484463
307
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/310
Pagina verder
Owners Manual L:7:9>I>DC
XC90
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo.
The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your
passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo
has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that
you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte-
nance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
2
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
00
00 Introduction
Important information................................. 8
Volvo and the environment....................... 12
01
01 Safety
Seatbelts .................................................. 16
Symbols, airbags...................................... 19
Airbags...................................................... 20
Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 22
Side airbags (SIPS bags).......................... 24
Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 26
WHIPS....................................................... 27
Roll-over protection - ROPS..................... 29
When the systems deploy......................... 30
Child safety............................................... 31
02
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive car.................... 48
Overview, right-hand drive car.................. 50
Driver's door control panel....................... 52
Combined instrument panel...................... 53
Indicator and warning symbols................. 55
Information display................................... 58
Switches in the centre console................. 59
Lighting panel........................................... 62
Left-hand stalk switch............................... 65
Trip computer*.......................................... 66
Right-hand stalk switch............................ 68
Cruise control*.......................................... 70
Parking brake, electrical socket, etc......... 72
Power windows......................................... 74
Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 76
Power sunroof*......................................... 81
HomeLink
*.............................................. 83
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3
03
03 Climate control
General information on climate control..... 88
Electronic Climate Control, ECC............... 91
Fuel-driven parking heater*....................... 94
04
04 Interior
Front seats................................................ 98
Front seats - Executive .......................... 101
Interior lighting........................................ 102
Storage spaces in the passenger com-
partment.................................................. 104
Storage spaces in the passenger com-
partment - Executive .............................. 109
Rear seat................................................. 110
Loading................................................... 112
Cargo area.............................................. 113
05
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key - key with remote con-
trol........................................................... 122
Locking and unlocking............................ 124
Child safety locks.................................... 128
Alarm*..................................................... 129
Table of contents
4
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06
06 Starting and driving
General.................................................... 134
Refuelling................................................ 137
Starting the engine.................................. 143
Automatic gearbox.................................. 145
All-wheel drive*....................................... 148
Brake system.......................................... 149
Stability and traction control system*..... 151
Park assist syst*...................................... 153
Blind Spot Information System - BLIS*... 155
Towing and recovery.............................. 159
Jump starting.......................................... 161
Driving with a trailer................................ 163
Towing equipment* ................................ 165
Detachable towbar* ............................... 167
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 171
07
07 Wheels and tyres
General.................................................... 178
Tyre pressure.......................................... 181
Warning triangle* and spare wheel*........ 182
Changing wheels.................................... 185
Emergency puncture repair*................... 188
08
08 Car care
Cleaning.................................................. 194
Touching up paintwork........................... 198
Rustproofing........................................... 200
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5
09
09 Maintenance and service
Volvo service........................................... 204
Self-maintenance.................................... 205
Bonnet and engine compartment........... 207
Oils and fluids......................................... 209
Wiper blades........................................... 213
Battery..................................................... 215
Replacing bulbs...................................... 218
Fuses...................................................... 225
10
10 Infotainment system
General.................................................... 238
Control panels, audio.............................. 239
Audio system functions.......................... 242
Radio functions....................................... 247
CD functions........................................... 253
Menu structure – audio system.............. 255
Phone functions*..................................... 256
Menu structure – phone.......................... 263
Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 266
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system -
Dual Screen* .......................................... 272
11
11 Specifications
Type designation..................................... 278
Dimensions and weights......................... 280
Engine specifications.............................. 282
Engine oil................................................ 283
Fluids and lubricants............................... 285
Fuel......................................................... 287
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pres-
sure ........................................................ 289
Catalytic converter.................................. 290
Electrical system..................................... 291
Type approval......................................... 293
Symbols in the display............................ 294
Table of contents
6
12
12 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 296
Table of contents
7
Introduction
Important information
8
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey. This will give you the opportunity
to familiarise yourself with new functions, to
see how best to handle the car in different sit-
uations, and to make the best use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the manual.
The specifications, design features and illus-
trations in this owner's manual are not binding.
We reserve the right to make modifications
without prior notice.
©
Volvo Car Corporation
Option
All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manual
also describes options (factory fitted equip-
ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra
equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's man-
ual is not available in all cars - they have dif-
ferent equipment depending on adaptations
for the needs of different markets and national
or local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is stand-
ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of features and functions for exam-
ple.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the text
that it refers to via a number. If the footnote
refers to text in a table then letters are used
instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are high-
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the
text being slightly larger and printed in grey.
Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-
sage texts on the information display (e.g.
DOORS OPEN).
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the
car have the following descending degree of
importance for the warning/information.
Warning for personal injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field. Used
to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
Introduction
Important information
9
warning is ignored, may result in serious per-
sonal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
G031592
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which,
if the warning is ignored, may result in damage
to property.
Information
G031593
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the owner's
manual.
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corres-
ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adja-
cent to the series of illustrations where the
order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum-
bered and are used to illustrate a move-
ment.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the reciprocal order is of
no relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
step instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different com-
ponents are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in con-
nection with the illustration that describes
the item.
Introduction
Important information
10
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
Coolant
Engine oil
To be continued
`
``
This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when a section continues on the following
page.
Recording data
Your vehicle contains a number of computers
whose function is to continuously check and
monitor the vehicle's operation and function-
ality. Some of the computers can record infor-
mation during normal driving if they detect an
error. In addition, information is recorded in the
event of a collision or incident. Parts of the
recorded information are required so that tech-
nicians can diagnose and rectify faults in the
vehicle during servicing and maintenance and
so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and
other regulations. In addition to this, the infor-
mation is used for research purposes by Volvo
in order to continually develop quality and
safety, as the information can contribute to a
better understanding of the factors that cause
accidents and injuries. The information
includes details of the status and functionality
of various systems and modules in the vehicle
with regard to engine, throttle, steering and
brake systems, amongst other things. This
information may include details regarding the
way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehi-
cle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,
steering wheel movement and whether or not
the driver and passengers have used their
seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa-
tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers
for a certain length of time, but also as a result
of a collision or incident. This information may
be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to
further develop and further enhance safety and
quality and as long as there are legal require-
ments and other regulations that Volvo needs
to consider.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri-
bed information being disclosed to third parties
without the vehicle owner's consent. However,
due to national legislation and regulations
Volvo may be required to disclose such infor-
mation to authorities such as police authorities,
or others who may assert a legal right to have
access to it.
To be able to read and interpret the information
recorded by the computers in the vehicle
requires special technical equipment that
Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo
is responsible that the information, which is
transferred to Volvo during servicing and main-
tenance, is stored and handled in a secure
manner and that the handling complies with
applicable legal requirements. For further infor-
mation - contact a Volvo dealer.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. We
therefore recommend that you always contact
an authorised Volvo workshop before installing
accessories which are connected to or affect
the electrical system.
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-
mation concerning your car.
To be able to read the QR code, you need a QR
code reader, which is available as an add-on
for a number of mobile phones. A QR code
reader can be downloaded from the App Store
or Android Market.
Introduction
Important information
11
QR code
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
12
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
G000000
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-
ration's core values which influence all opera-
tions. We also believe that our customers share
our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufac-
tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-
efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-
ration has global ISO certification, which
includes the environmental standard ISO
14001 covering all factories and several of our
other units. We also set requirements for our
partners so that they work systematically with
environmental issues.
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption
in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel
consumption generally results in lower emis-
sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-
sumption. For more information read under the
heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-
cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger com-
partment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-
rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-
ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out-
side.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-
tored continuously and if there is an increase in
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
13
the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone
and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon
filter.
Interior
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-
sant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption
for your car. In this way you contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and mainte-
nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-
tem. We make clear demands regarding the
way in which our workshops are designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. Our workshop staff have the
knowledge and the tools required to guarantee
good environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmental
impact - here are a few tips:
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
Drive economically - think ahead.
Perform service and maintenance in
accordance with the owner's manual's
instructions - follow the Service and War-
ranty Booklet's recommended intervals.
If the car is equipped with an engine block
heater*, use it before starting from cold - it
improves starting capacity and reduces
wear in cold weather and the engine rea-
ches normal operating temperature more
quickly, which lowers consumption and
reduces emissions.
High speed increases consumption con-
siderably due to increased wind resistance
- a doubling of speed increases wind resis-
tance 4 times.
Always dispose of environmentally hazar-
dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a
workshop in the event of uncertainty about
how this type of waste should be discarded
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Following this advice can save money, the
planet's resources are saved, and the car's
durability is extended. For more information
and further advice, see the pages 134 and
287.
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
important that the car is recycled in an envi-
ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
referral to a certified/approved recycling
facility.
The owner's manual and the
environment
The Forest Stewardship Council
symbol
shows that the paper pulp in this publication
comes from FSC
certified forests or other
controlled sources.
14
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seatbelts ................................................................................................ 16
Symbols, airbags.................................................................................... 19
Airbags.................................................................................................... 20
Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 22
Side airbags (SIPS bags)........................................................................ 24
Inflatable Curtain (IC).............................................................................. 26
WHIPS..................................................................................................... 27
Roll-over protection - ROPS................................................................... 29
When the systems deploy....................................................................... 30
Child safety............................................................................................. 31
SAFETY
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
16
Always use a seatbelt
G020104
Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be posi-
tioned low down.
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all
passengers use their seatbelts. It is important
that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can
provide maximum protection. Do not lean the
backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed
to protect in a normal seating position.
Putting on a seatbelt:
Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by
pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud
"click" indicates that the seatbelt has
locked.
Releasing the seatbelt
Press the red lock button and then let the
seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not
retract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand so
that it does not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be
withdrawn
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
Keep in mind the following
do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or
caught on anything
the hip strap must be positioned low down
(not over the abdomen)
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-
son.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-
self. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop. If a seatbelt has
been subjected to a major load, such as in
conjunction with a collision, the entire seat-
belt must be replaced. Some of the protec-
tive characteristics of the seatbelt may have
been lost, even if it appears to be undam-
aged. In addition, replace the seatbelt if the
belt is worn or damaged. The new seatbelt
must be type-approved and intended for
installation in the same position as the
replaced seatbelt.
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
17
Seatbelts and pregnancy
G020105
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section should wrap
over the shoulder then be routed between the
breasts and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. –
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure
that it fits as close to the body as possible. In
addition, check that there are no twists in the
seatbelt.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain full control
of the vehicle as they drive (which means they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and the steering wheel). Within this context,
they should strive to position the seat with as
large a distance as possible between the abdo-
men and the steering wheel.
Seatbelt reminder
G027049
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind
the driver and front seat passenger to use a
seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one.
The audio reminder is speed dependent (at low
speeds), and time dependent (when the car is
started). The visual reminder is located in the
roof console and in the combined instrument
panel.
NOTE
The seatbelt reminder is intended for an
adult sitting in the front seat. If a belt-fitted
child seat is fitted in the front seat, the seat-
belt reminder does not switch on.
Certain markets
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind
the driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one.
At low speed, the audio reminder will sound for
the first 6 seconds.
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts (except the centre rear seat-
belt) are equipped with seatbelt tensioners. A
mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens
the seatbelt around the body in the event of a
sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then
provides more effective restraint for the occu-
pants.
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
18
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. Do not make
any damages on seatbelts nor insert any
foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts
and buckles would then possibly not func-
tion as intended in the event of a collision.
There is a risk of serous injury.
01 Safety
Symbols, airbags
01
19
Warning symbol on the combined
instrument panel
G027284
The warning symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel illuminates when the remote con-
trol key is turned to key position I, II or III. The
symbol goes out after approx. 6 seconds pro-
vided the airbag system is fault-free.
As well as the warning symbol, a
message may appear on the dis-
play in appropriate cases. If the
warning symbol malfunctions, the
warning triangle illuminates and
the message
SRS AIRBAG
SERVICE URGENT
appears in
the display. Volvo recommends
that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system
remains illuminated or illuminates while driv-
ing, it means that the airbag system does
not have full functionality. The symbol may
indicate a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys-
tem, the SIPS, SRS or IC systems. Volvo
recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop immediately.
01 Safety
Airbags
01
20
Airbag system
G020111
SRS system, left-hand drive.
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To
cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when
compressed. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely nor-
mal. The entire process, including inflation and
deflation of the airbag, takes place within
tenths of a second.
G020110
SRS system, right-hand drive
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious per-
sonal injury.
NOTE
The sensors react differently depending on
the course of the collision and whether the
seatbelts on the driver's side and passenger
side are in use.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-
sion. The SRS system senses the force of
the collision on the car and adapts accord-
ingly so that one or more airbags is
deployed.
The airbags have a function whereby their
capacities are adapted to the collision force
to which the car is subjected.
01 Safety
Airbags
01
21
G020113
Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand drive
and right-hand drive cars.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
instrument panel where the passenger air-
bag is located.
Airbag on the driver's side
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-
tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's
side. It is folded up into the centre of the steer-
ing wheel. The steering wheel is marked SRS
AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
Passenger airbag
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-
tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-
ger side. It is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. The cover panel is marked
SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must
be secured.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated.
1
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat. No one shorter
than 140 cm should ever sit in the front pas-
senger seat if the airbag is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
1
For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
01
22
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Key switch off - PACOS*
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can be
deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For
information on how to activate/deactivate, see
under the heading Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instru-
ment panel and is accessible when the pas-
senger door is open, (see under the heading
below, Activating/deactivating).
Check that the switch is in the required posi-
tion. Volvo recommends that the key blade is
used to change position.
For information on the key blade, see
page 122.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated. Failure to follow this advice
could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passenger
airbag, but does not have PACOS, then the
airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-
senger seat if the text message in the rear-
view mirror indicates that the airbag is deac-
tivated, and if the warning symbol for the
airbag system is also displayed on the com-
bined instrument panel. This indicates that
there has been a severe malfunction. Visit a
workshop as soon as possible. Volvo rec-
ommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop
Activating/deactivating
Switch location.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
23
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion on the front passenger seat
when the airbag is activated. This applies to
everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in
the front passenger seat when the airbag is
deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
Message
G027050
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
deactivated.
A text message in the rearview mirror indicates
that the airbag for the front passenger seat is
deactivated (see preceding illustration).
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
01
24
Side airbag
G020118
Side airbag locations.
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-
lars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-
er's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and are an important part of the
system. The side airbags are located in the
front seat backrests.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repairs are only
carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPS-
bag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
Do not place any objects in the area
between the outside of the seat and the
door panel, since this area is required
by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
Side airbags are a supplement the seat-
belts. Always use a seatbelt.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed
on the front passenger seat provided that the
car does not have an activated
1
passenger air-
bag.
Location
Driver's seat, left-hand drive
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.
1
For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
01
25
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive
The airbag inflates between the occupant and
the door panel and thereby cushions the initial
impact. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
01
26
Properties
G027047
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a
part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the
headlining along both sides of the roof and
protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer
seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the
sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
driver and passengers from striking their heads
on the inside of the car during a collision.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could compromise the intended pro-
tection. Volvo recommends that you only
ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the side windows. Other-
wise, the intended protection of the inflat-
able curtain, which is concealed in the head-
lining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
01 Safety
WHIPS
01
27
Protection against whiplash injury – WHIPS
G020347
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-
sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-
cially designed head restraints in the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the col-
lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to alter
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position
For the best possible protection, the driver and
front seat passenger should sit in the centre of
the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
01 Safety
WHIPS
01
28
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
G020125
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat back-
rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
G020126
Do not place objects in the rear seat that may pre-
vent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the folded
backrest.
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo
recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-
tem checked even after a minor rear-end
collision.
01 Safety
Roll-over protection - ROPS
01
29
Function
Volvo's Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)
has been designed to reduce the risk of the car
overturning and to provide the best possible
protection in the event of such an accident.
The system consists of:
A stabiliser system, RSC (Roll Stability
Control) that minimises the risk of over-
turning during sudden evasive manoeu-
vres or the like or if the car skids.
Increased protection for the driver and
passengers through a reinforced body,
inflatable curtains and seatbelt tensioners
in all seats. See also pages 17 and 26.
The RSC system uses a gyro sensor which
registers changes in the car's lateral inclination
angle. This information is then used to calcu-
late the risk for overturning. If a risk is detected,
the DSTC system is engaged, engine speed is
reduced and one or more wheels are braked
until the car returns to a stable position.
For more information on the DSTC system, see
page 151.
WARNING
Under normal driving conditions, the RSC
system improves the car's road safety, but
this must not be taken as a reason to
increase speed. Always follow the usual
precautions for safe driving.
01 Safety
When the systems deploy
01
30
System Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner In a frontal collision and/or overturning.
Airbags SRS
In a frontal collision
A
Side airbags SIPS
In a side-impact accident
A
Inflatable Curtain IC
In a side-impact accident and/or overturning
A
.
Whiplash protection WHIPS In a rear-end collision.
RSC During sudden evasive manoeuvres or the like or if the car skids.
A
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of
the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have deployed, the following is
recommended:
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised
Volvo workshop for repair. Do not drive
with deployed airbags.
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys-
tems are deployed only once during a colli-
sion.
WARNING
The airbag control module is located in the
centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, discon-
nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to
start the car since the airbags may deploy.
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that
you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The smoke
and dust created when the airbags are
deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/
injury after intensive exposure. In case of
irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid
deployment sequence and airbag fabric
may cause friction and skin burns.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
31
Children should sit comfortably and
safely
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-
facing child seats until as late an age as pos-
sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then
front-facing booster cushions/child seats up to
10 years of age.
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size, for more information, see page 32.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child
to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo's own child safety equipment is
designed for your car. Volvo recommends that
you use Volvo genuine equipment to best
ensure that the mounting points and attach-
ments are correctly positioned and are suffi-
ciently strong.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Child seats
G020128
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using other child safety products it is
important to read the installation instruc-
tions included with the product.
WARNING
Do not attach the child seat's straps in the
seat's horizontal adjustment bar, springs or
rails and beams under the seat. Sharp
edges may damage the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
Location of child seats
You may place:
a child seat/booster cushion on the front
passenger seat, provided the passenger
airbag is not activated
1
.
one or more child seats/booster cushions
in the rear seat.
Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the
rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. A
child in the front passenger seat could suffer
serious injury if the airbag deploys.
1
For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
32
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
2
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button
must not be used, as they could cause the
seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
Label Airbag
The label becomes visible when the passenger
door is opened; see the illustration on page 22.
Recommended child seats
3
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Group 0
<10 kg
Group 0+
<13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Group 0
<10 kg
Group 0+
<13 kg
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
2
For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.
3
For other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
33
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Group 0
<10 kg
Group 0+
<13 kg
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and
straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and
straps
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
01 Safety
Child safety
01
34
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
35
Weight
Second row of seats, outer seats
A
Second row of seats, centre seat
A
Third row of seats in cars seating
seven
Group 0
<10 kg
Group 0+
<13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Group 0
<10 kg
Group 0+
<13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Group 0
<10 kg
Group 0+
<13 kg
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt, straps and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt, straps and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Group 0
<10 kg
Group 0+
<13 kg
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
01 Safety
Child safety
01
36
Weight
Second row of seats, outer seats
A
Second row of seats, centre seat
A
Third row of seats in cars seating
seven
Group 1
9-18 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac-
ing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt, straps and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture system
and straps.
Type approval: E5 03171
(L)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
37
Weight
Second row of seats, outer seats
A
Second row of seats, centre seat
A
Third row of seats in cars seating
seven
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac-
ing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac-
ing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac-
ing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Booster cushion with and without back-
rest (Booster Cushion with and without
backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without back-
rest (Booster Cushion with and without
backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without back-
rest (Booster Cushion with and without
backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo
Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo
Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo
Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
01 Safety
Child safety
01
38
Weight
Second row of seats, outer seats
A
Second row of seats, centre seat
A
Third row of seats in cars seating
seven
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Integrated booster cushion (Integrated
Booster Cushion) - available as a factory
fitted option.
Type approval: E5 03167
(B)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
A
In cars seating seven, the seat row must be in its rearmost position when using a child seat.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
39
Integrated booster cushion*
G031071
Volvo's integrated booster cushion for the cen-
tre rear seat is specially designed to provide
optimum safety for children. Combined with
the regular seatbelts the integrated booster
cushion is approved for children weighing
between 15 and 36 kg.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
4
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
Raising the booster cushion
G030708
1. Pull the handle on the front of the booster
cushion forwards and then up so that the
booster cushion is raised.
2. Grasp the cushion with both hands and
push it backwards.
3. Push until the cushion locks in place.
WARNING
The booster cushion must be in the locked
position before the child is placed there.
Check that:
the seatbelt is locked.
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted, and that
the seatbelt is positioned correctly across
the shoulder.
the lap belt is low over the pelvis for opti-
mum protection.
the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
throat or below the shoulder.
Carefully adjust the position of the head
restraint to suit the child.
4
For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
40
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repair or replace-
ment is only carried out by an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifi-
cations or additions to the booster cushion.
If an integrated booster cushion has been
subjected to a major load, such as in con-
junction with a collision, the entire booster
cushion must be replaced. Even if the
booster cushion appears to be undamaged,
it may not afford the same level of protec-
tion. The booster cushion must also be
replaced if it is heavily worn.
Lowering the booster cushion
1. Pull the handle forwards.
2. Move the cushion down and press until it
locks.
NOTE
Remember to stow away the booster cush-
ion before lowering the rear seat backrest.
Child safety locks, rear doors
The controls for operating the rear door power
windows and the rear door opening handles
can be blocked from opening from the inside.
For more information see page 128.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats*
G015268
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre-
ceding illustration).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
NOTE
The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessory
for the passenger seat.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Size classes
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Consequently, there is a size classification for
child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in
order to assist users in choosing the correct
child seat (see the following table).
Size
class
Description
A Full size, front-facing child
seat
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-
facing child seat
01 Safety
Child safety
01
41
Size
class
Description
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-
facing child seat
C Full size, rear-facing child
seat
D Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat
E Rear-facing infant seat
Size
class
Description
F Transverse infant seat, left-
hand
G Transverse infant seat, right-
hand
WARNING
Never place a child in the passenger seat if
the car is equipped with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-
cation then the car model must be included
on the child seat's vehicle list.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-
tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max 10 kg
(0 – 9 months)
F X X
G X X
Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg
(0 – 9 months)
E X OK
(IL)
01 Safety
Child safety
01
42
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg
(0 – 12
months)
E X OK
(IL)
D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg
(9-36 months)
D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
43
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg
(9-36 months)
B X
OK
A
(IUF)
B1 X
OK
A
(IUF)
A X
OK
A
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
44
Mounting points for child seat
G027032
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for child seats. These mounting points
are located on the rear of the rear seats.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.
NOTE
These mounting points are only on the sec-
ond row of seats in cars seating seven.
Fold the backrest forward to access the
mounting points. For detailed information on
how the child seat should be tensioned in the
upper mounting points, see the seat manufac-
turer's instructions.
Extra locking function in seatbelt (ALR/
ELR)
5
The seatbelt in the centre of the second row of
seats has an extra locking function (ALR/ELR).
The locking function helps to hold the belt taut
in order to facilitate child seat installation.
When installing a child seat with the help of the
seatbelt:
1. Secure the seatbelt in the child seat fol-
lowing the instructions of the child seat
manufacturer.
2. Pull out the entire seatbelt.
3. Lock the seatbelt by inserting the locking
tab in the buckle. A clear "click" indicates
that the seatbelt has locked.
4. Allow the seatbelt mechanism to retract
the seatbelt while stretching it around the
child seat. A mechanical sound will be
audible from the seatbelt. This is normal.
This function is automatically deactivated
when the seatbelt is released from the buckle
and retracts back to its starting position.
If there are any problems with installation of
child safety products, contact the manufac-
turer for clearer installation instructions.
5
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor.
01 Safety
01
45
46
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Overview, left-hand drive car.................................................................. 48
Overview, right-hand drive car................................................................ 50
Driver's door control panel..................................................................... 52
Combined instrument panel.................................................................... 53
Indicator and warning symbols............................................................... 55
Information display.................................................................................. 58
Switches in the centre console............................................................... 59
Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 62
Left-hand stalk switch............................................................................. 65
Trip computer*........................................................................................ 66
Right-hand stalk switch.......................................................................... 68
Cruise control*........................................................................................ 70
Parking brake, electrical socket, etc....................................................... 72
Power windows....................................................................................... 74
Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 76
Power sunroof*....................................................................................... 81
HomeLink
*............................................................................................ 83
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive car
02
48
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive car
02
49
Lighting panel
Panel vents
Display
Temperature gauge
Odometer, trip meter, cruise control
Speedometer
Direction indicators
Tachometer
Outside temperature, clock, gear position
Fuel gauge
Indicator and warning symbols
Panel vents
Glovebox
Hazard warning flashers
Audio system
Climate control
Windscreen wipers
Keypad for phone/audio
Combined instrument panel
Horn
Cruise control
Direction indicators, dipped-main beam
switch, READ button
Parking brake
Parking brake release
Switches, reading lamps
Passenger compartment lighting
Sunroof control
Seatbelt reminder
Rearview mirror
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive car
02
50
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive car
02
51
Lighting panel
Panel vents
Indicator and warning symbols
Fuel gauge
Outside temperature, clock, gear position
Tachometer
Direction indicators
Speedometer
Odometer, trip meter, cruise control
Temperature gauge
Display
Panel vents
Glovebox
Hazard warning flashers
Audio system
Climate control
Direction indicators, dipped-main beam
switch, READ button
Parking brake
Cruise control
Horn
Combined instrument panel
Phone/Audio keypad
Windscreen wipers
Parking brake release
Switches, reading lamps
Passenger compartment lighting
Sunroof control
Seatbelt reminder
Rearview mirror
02 Instruments and controls
Driver's door control panel
02
52
Control panel
G029570
Lock button, for all doors
Blocking power windows in the rear doors
Power window controls
Door mirror control
02 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel
02
``
53
G026973
Temperature gauge – Displays the tem-
perature of the engine cooling system. A
message will appear on the display if the
gauge goes into the red zone. Bear in mind
that extra lights placed in front of the air
intake reduce the cooling capacity of the
system.
Display – The display shows information
and warning messages.
Speedometer – Shows the speed of the
car.
Trip meters T1 and T2 – Used for measur-
ing short distances. The right-hand digit
displays tenths of a kilometre. Press the
button for more than 2 seconds to reset.
Switch between trip meters with one quick
press of the button.
Cruise control indicator.
Odometer – The odometer indicates the
total distance the car has travelled.
Main beam indicator
Warning symbol – If a fault arises, the sym-
bol illuminates and a message is shown in
the display.
Tachometer – Indicates engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Do not allow the tachometer gauge to enter
the red zone.
Automatic gearbox indicator – The
selected gear position is displayed here.
Outside temperature gauge – When the
temperature lies between +2 °C to 5 °C, a
snowflake symbol illuminates in the dis-
play. This warns of icy roads. If the car has
been stationary, the gauge may display a
reading that is too high.
Knob for clock – Turn the knob to adjust
the time.
When the lamp in the instrument illumi-
nates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel
as soon as possible. See also Trip com-
puter page 66.
02 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel
02
54
Indicator and warning symbols
Direction indicators – left/right
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
55
Functionality check, symbols
All indicator and warning symbols
1
illuminate
when the remote control key is turned to posi-
tion II before starting. This is to check that the
symbols are working. When the engine starts,
all the symbols should go out except the park-
ing brake symbol, which only goes out when
the brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start within
5 seconds, all symbols extinguish
except the symbols for a fault in
the car's emissions system and for
low oil pressure.
Certain symbols may have no
function, depending on the car's
specifications.
Symbols in the centre of the instrument
panel
These symbols illuminate with a
red or amber glow depending on
the severity of the fault.
Red symbol
1. Stop the car in a safe place. Do not drive
the car further. Do not drive the car further.
2. Read the information on the display.
3. Rectify in accordance with the instructions
in the display or contact a workshop. Volvo
recommends that you seek assistance
from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Symbol and message text are visible until the
fault has been rectified.
Yellow symbol
Read the message in the display. Action.
The message text is cleared using the READ
button, see page 58, or it disappears auto-
matically after 2 minutes.
NOTE
When the message text TIME FOR
REGULAR SERVICE
is shown, the symbol
and message text are cleared using the
READ button, or disappear automatically
after 2 minutes.
1
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 209.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
56
Indicator symbols
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the
system is not working. The car's
regular brake system continues to
work, but without the ABS func-
tion.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. Volvo recommends that drive to an author-
ised Volvo workshop to have the ABS sys-
tem checked if the symbol remains illumi-
nated.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fluid level may be too low.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and check the
level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 212.
2.
If the reservoir level is below MIN then the
car should not be driven further, but recov-
ered instead. Volvo recommends that the
car is transported to an authorised Volvo
workshop to have the brake system
checked.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols
illuminate at the same time, there
may be a fault in the brake force
distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-
ing.
If the symbols remain illuminated, check
the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 212.
If the brake fluid reservoir's level is normal
but the symbols are still illuminated, the car
can be driven, with great care, to an
authorised workshop recommended by
Volvo to have the brake system checked.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
below MIN then the car should not be
driven any further. Have the car transpor-
ted to an authorised workshop recom-
mended by Volvo to have the brake system
checked.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are illumi-
nated at the same time, there is a risk that
the rear end will skid during heavy braking.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates if someone
in a front seat has not put on their
seatbelt.
Low oil pressure
2
If this symbol illuminates during
driving then the engine's oil pres-
sure is too low. Stop the engine
immediately and check the engine
oil level, top up if necessary. If the
symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal,
contact an authorised workshop recom-
mended by Volvo.
2
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 209.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
57
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Volvo recom-
mends that you drive to an author-
ised Volvo workshop for inspec-
tion.
Airbags – SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated
or illuminates while driving, it
means a fault has been detected in
the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS or
IC system. Volvo recommends that
drive directly to an authorised Volvo workshop
for inspection.
Alternator not charging
If this symbol illuminates while
driving, a fault has occurred in the
electrical system. Volvo recom-
mends that you visit an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during
engine preheating. Preheating
occurs when the temperature is
below 2 °C. The car can be started
once the symbol goes out.
Parking brake applied
The symbol illuminates when the
parking brake is depressed.
Always depress the parking brake
to its bottom position.
NOTE
The symbol illuminates irrespective of how
hard the parking brake is depressed.
Rear fog lamp
This symbol is lit when the rear fog
lamp is on.
Indicator symbol for trailer
This symbol flashes when the
direction indicators are used and
the trailer is connected. If the sym-
bol does not flash then one of the
lamps on the trailer or the car is
faulty.
Stability system DSTC
For information on the system's
functions and symbols, see
page 152.
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors or the boot lid is not properly
closed the driver will be reminded of this.
Low speed
If the car moves at a speed less than
about 7 km/h, the information symbol illumi-
nates and
DRIVER DOOR OPEN ,
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN ,LEFT REAR
DOOR OPEN
or RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
is shown in the display at the same time. Stop
the car safely as soon as possible and close the
door or bonnet.
High speed
If the car is moving faster than
about 7 km/h then the symbol illu-
minates and one of the texts indi-
cated in the previous paragraph
appears in the display at the same
time.
Tailgate reminder
If the tailgate is open, TAILGATE OPEN will
appear on the display.
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
58
Messages
When a warning or indicator symbol illumi-
nates, it is supplemented by a message
appearing on the display.
Press the READ button (1).
Switch between messages with the READ but-
ton. Fault messages are stored in the memory
until the fault is rectified.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must
be read (press READ) before the previous
activity can be resumed.
Message Specification
STOP SAFELY
A
Stop the car in a safe
manner and turn off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
STOP ENGINE
A
Stop the car in a safe
manner and turn off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
SERVICE
URGENT
A
Volvo recommends
that you engage an
authorised Volvo
workshop to check
the car immediately.
SEE MANUAL
A
Read the owner's
manual.
SERVICE
REQUIRED
A
Volvo recommends
that you engage an
authorised Volvo
workshop to check
the car as soon as
possible.
Message Specification
TIME FOR REGU-
LAR SERVICE
Time for regular
service. Volvo rec-
ommends that you
engage an author-
ised Volvo work-
shop to carry out the
service. The timing
is determined by the
number of kilome-
tres driven, number
of months since the
last service and
engine running time.
SOOT FILTER
FULL SEE MAN-
UAL
Diesel particle filter
requires regenera-
tion, see page 141.
DSTC SPIN CON-
TROL OFF
The function of the
stability and traction
control system is
reduced, see
page 151 for more
variants.
A
Part of message, shown together with information on where
the problem has arisen.
02 Instruments and controls
Switches in the centre console
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
59
Switch
G026944
NOTE
The order of the buttons may vary.
Air conditioning in the rear of the
passenger compartment*
Press the button to activate the
air conditioning in the rear of
the passenger compartment.
Rear passenger compartment
air conditioning is deactivated
when the ignition is switched
off.
Child safety locks in the rear doors*
Activating or deactivating the
electric child safety locks in the
rear doors. The remote control
key must be in position I or II.
When the child safety locks are
activated, the lamp in the but-
ton illuminates. A message is shown in the dis-
play when the child safety locks are activated
or deactivated, see page 128.
Retractable power door mirrors*
Used to fold in the door mirrors
if they are folded out or to fold
them out if they are folded in.
Proceed as follows if a door mirror has been
accidentally folded in or out:
1. Manually adjust the appropriate door mir-
ror to its normal position.
2.
Turn the remote control key to position II.
02 Instruments and controls
Switches in the centre console
02
60
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3. Fold the door mirror inward and then out-
ward using the button.
The door mirrors have now returned to their
original fixed positions.
Park Assist*
The system is always activated
when the car is started. Press
the button to deactivate/reacti-
vate the parking assistance
system. See also page 153.
Deactivation of the deadlocks* and
detectors
Use this button when you wish
to switch off the deadlock func-
tion (doors cannot be opened
from the inside when locked).
This button can also be used
when deactivating the alarm
system's movement and tilt detectors*. The
lamp illuminates when these systems are shut
down/deactivated, see pages 126 and 130.
Auxiliary lamps*
Use this button to switch the
auxiliary lamps on with main
beam or to switch them off.
Active Xenon headlamps*
If the car is equipped with
active Xenon headlamps
(Active Bending Lights, ABL)
the light from the headlamps
follows the steering wheel
movement during driving. The
function is activated automatically when the
car is started and can be deactivated/activated
by pressing the button. The lamp in the button
illuminates when the function is activated
Shifting headlamp pattern for right/left-
hand traffic
Hold the button depressed for at least 5 sec-
onds. The car must be stationary when the
headlamp pattern is shifted. The message
HEADLIGHTS SET FOR RH TRAFFIC or
HEADLIGHTS SET FOR LH TRAFFIC is
shown in the display. For more information and
adapting headlamp pattern for halogen or Dual
Xenon headlamps, see page 171.
Electric socket/Cigarette lighter*
The electrical socket can be
used for 12 V accessories, such
as mobile phone chargers and
coolers.
The remote control key must be at least in
position I so that the socket can supply power.
The cigarette lighter is activated by pushing in
the button. The button pops out when the
lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cig-
arette on the heated coils. For safety reasons,
always keep the cover in place when the
socket is not in use. Max. current tap 10 A.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is
used at a time. If both sockets (in the centre
console and by the rear seat) are used at the
same time then 7.5 A (90 W) per socket
applies.
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sock-
ets then no other current consumers may be
connected to the other one.
NOTE
The compressor for emergency puncture
repair is tested and approved by Volvo. For
information about using Volvo's recom-
mended temporary mobility kit (TMK) for
emergency puncture repair, see page 188.
02 Instruments and controls
Switches in the centre console
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
61
BLIS - Blind Spot Information System*
Press the button to deactivate
or reactivate the function. see
page 155 for further informa-
tion.
Hazard warning flashers
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
0
*
#
POWER
V
O
L
U
M
E
CD
AM FM
G027096
Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction
indicators flash) when the car is stopped where
it could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Press
the button to activate the function.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the use of hazard
warning flashers vary from country to coun-
try.
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Heating is used to quickly
remove misting and ice from
the rear window and door mir-
rors. Press the switch to start
defrosting the rear window and
door mirrors. The lamp in the
switch illuminates. The light in
the switch is lit. Defrosting is
automatically disconnected
after about 12 minutes.
Heated front seats
For heated front seats, see
page 91 or 93 for further
information.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
62
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information
Light switches
Automatic daytime running lights during
the day.
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
Rear fog lamp
Thumbwheel for adjusting instrument light-
ing
Posi-
tion
Specification
Automatic/deactivated dipped
beam. Only main beam flash.
Daytime running lights when the
car is being driven. Automatic
switching to parking lights when
the car is parked.
Automatic dipped beam. Main
beam and main beam flash
work in this position.
Headlamps
Automatic dipped beam*
Dipped beam comes on automatically when
the remote control key is turned to position II,
except when the headlamp control (1) is in the
centre position. If necessary, the automatic
dipped beam can be deactivated. Volvo rec-
ommends that you engage an authorised Volvo
workshop to have it deactivated.
Automatic dipped beam, main beam
1.
Turn the remote control key to position II.
2. Dipped beam is activated by means of
turning the headlamp control (1) clockwise
to the end position.
3. Main beam is activated by means of mov-
ing the left-hand stalk switch towards the
steering wheel to the end position and
releasing it, see page 65.
The lamps are switched off automatically when
the remote control key is turned to position I or
0.
Position/parking lamps
Position/parking lamps can be switched on
irrespective of remote control key position.
Turn the headlamp control (1) to the centre
position.
When the remote control key is in position II the
position/parking lamps and number plate light-
ing are always switched on.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-
zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting
the height of the beam.
1.
Turn the remote control key to position II.
2. Turn the headlamp control (1) to one of the
end positions.
3. Roll the thumbwheel (3) up or down
respectively to raise or lower beam align-
ment.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
63
Cars with Xenon headlamps* have automatic
headlamp levelling, so there is no thumbwheel
(3).
Instrument lighting
The instrument lighting is switched on when
the remote control key is in position II and the
headlamp control (1) is in one of the end posi-
tions. The lighting is automatically dimmed
during the day and can be controlled manually
at night.
Roll the thumbwheel (5) up or down for brighter
or dimmer lighting.
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on in
combination with the headlamps.
Press the button (4).
The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the com-
bined instrument panel and the light in the but-
ton illuminate when the rear fog lamp is
switched on.
NOTE
Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from
country to country.
Active Xenon headlamps*
G020789
Headlamp pattern for active/non-active head-
lamps.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head-
lamps (Active Bending Lights, ABL) the light
from the headlamps follows the steering wheel
movement during driving. The function is acti-
vated automatically when the car is started and
can be deactivated/activated using the button
in the centre console, see page 60.
Daytime running lights during the day.
To save fuel, daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Light) can be selected during the day
instead of the more energy-intensive dipped
beam. The daytime running lights mounted in
the spoiler use bright, low-energy diode tech-
nology.
Press the button (2) and turn the headlamp
control (1) clockwise to the end position in
order to activate the daytime running lights
during daytime. This is regulated by a light sen-
sor which switches from daytime running lights
to dipped beam off the main headlamps at
dusk or when the daylight becomes too weak.
The light in the button illuminates when the
daytime running lights are activated.
NOTE
To achieve minimal energy consumption,
the rear lights are also switched off when
switching automatically from dipped beam
to daytime running lights.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
64
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is
too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with its lights in a cor-
rect state and in accordance with applicable
traffic regulations.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
65
Stalk switch positions
Short flash sequence, direction indicators
Continuous flash sequence, direction indi-
cators
Main beam flash
Home safe lighting and switching of
dipped and main beam
Direction indicators
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to end
position (B).
The stalk switch remains in its end position and
is moved back manually, or automatically by
steering wheel movement.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to posi-
tion (A) and release, the stalk switch then
returns to its home position, or move the
stalk switch to position (B) and move it
directly back to the home position.
The direction indicators flash three times. Short
flash sequence interrupted immediately if indi-
cating is started in the opposite direction.
Switching, main and dipped beam
The remote control key must be in position II
for main beam to be switched on.
1. Turn the headlamp control clockwise to the
end position, see page 62.
2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering
wheel to the end position (D) and release.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the
steering wheel to position (C).
Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is
released.
Home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked. The standard delay is
30 seconds
1
, but can be changed to 60 or
90 seconds.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering
wheel to the end position (D) and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
1
Factory settings.
02 Instruments and controls
Trip computer*
02
66
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
READ - confirms
Thumbwheel - browse between menus
and options in the trip computer list
RESET - resets
Controls
To scroll through trip computer information,
turn the thumbwheel (2) either up or down in
steps. Continue turning to return to the starting
point.
NOTE
If a warning message interrupts while you
are using the trip computer, this message
must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by
pressing the READ button and revert to the
trip computer function.
Functions
The trip computer displays the following infor-
mation:
--- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED
--.- KM/L INSTANTANEOUS
--.- KM/L AVERAGE
--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
DSTC ON , see page 151
--- MPH ACTUAL SPEED
1
*
AVERAGE SPEED
When the ignition is switched off, the average
speed is stored and used as the basis of the
new value when you continue driving. Reset
using the RESET button.
INSTANTANEOUS
Current fuel consumption is calculated every
second. The information on the display is
updated every couple of seconds. When the
car is stationary, "
----" appears on the display.
During the period for regeneration
2
fuel con-
sumption may increase, see page 141.
AVERAGE
The average fuel consumption since the last
reset. Reset using RESET.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven parking heater* has been used.
KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display
shows the approximate distance that can be
driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the
tank. No guaranteed range remains when the
display shows "
--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY
TANK
". Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven parking heater* has been used
or if driving style has been changed.
1
Only in certain markets.
2
Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.
02 Instruments and controls
Trip computer*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
67
MPH ACTUAL SPEED.*
1
Current speed is displayed in mph if the speed-
ometer is graduated in km/h. If it is graduated
in mph then the current speed is shown in mph.
Resetting
1.
Select
--- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED or
--.- KM/L AVERAGE
2.
Press and hold the RESET button (3) for at
least five seconds to reset the average
speed and average consumption at the
same time.
1
Only in certain markets.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
68
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Windscreen wipers
G026953
Wiper/washer function – windscreen.
Thumbwheel
Rain sensor - On/Off
Windscreen wipers off
The windscreen wipers are off
when the stalk switch is in position
0.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch to make a
single sweep.
Intermittent wiping
You can set a suitable delay
between the sweeps. Turn the
thumbwheel up for a shorter inter-
val between sweeps. Turn it down
to increase the delay.
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal
speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter -
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in and that any snow or ice on the wind-
screen (and rear window) is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The wind-
screen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically activates the
windscreen wipers based on how much water
it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel.
Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sen-
sitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity, (an
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upwards).
On/Off
When activating the rain sensor, the remote
control key must be in position I or II and the
windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in posi-
tion 0 (not activated).
To activate the rain sensor:
Press the button. A lamp in the button illu-
minates to indicate that the rain sensor is
active.
To turn the rain sensor off, either:
Press the button. The lamp in the button
goes out.
Press the stalk switch downward to
another wiper program. If the stalk switch
is raised, the rain sensor will remain active,
the wipers make an extra sweep and then
return to rain sensor mode when the stalk
is released to position 0.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
69
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the remote control key is removed from
the ignition switch or 5 minutes after the igni-
tion is switched off.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac-
tivate the rain sensor by depressing button
(2) while the remote control key is in position
I or II.
Windscreen/headlamp washer
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers. The wipers will make several more
sweeps once the stalk switch is released.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are only washed every fifth wash
cycle (within a 10 minute period). When 10
minutes have elapsed following the latest
windscreen washing, the headlamps are again
washed with high-pressure with the first wind-
screen washing. Turn the stalk switch toward
the steering wheel to wash the windscreen
only.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in
the reservoir and the message that you should
fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined
instrument panel's display, then the supply of
washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off.
This is in order to prioritise cleaning the wind-
screen and the visibility through it.
Wiper and washer, rear window
Wiper/washer function – rear window.
Intermittent wiping: Depress the top of the
button.
Constant speed: Depress the bottom of
the button.
Move the stalk switch forward to start rear win-
dow washing and wiping. The wiper blade
makes several extra sweeps once washing has
finished.
Wiper – reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window
wiping.
1
. If the rear window wiper is already on
at normal speed, no change is made.
1
This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop to have it deactivated.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
02
70
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Activating
G027098
The controls for cruise control are to the left of
the steering wheel.
Setting the desired speed:
1.
Press the CRUISE button.
CRUISE is
shown on the combined instrument panel.
2.
Touch + or to lock the vehicle speed.
CRUISE-ON is shown.
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds
below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.
Increasing or decreasing speed
G026949
Increase or decrease the speed by press-
ing and holding + or . The speed of the car
when the button is released is set as the
new speed.
A brief press (less than half a second) on + or
changes the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph
1
.
NOTE
A temporary increase in speed (less than
one minute) using the accelerator, such as
while overtaking, does not affect the cruise
control setting. When you release the accel-
erator, the car will return to the programmed
speed.
Temporary disengagement
Press 0 to disengage the cruise control
temporarily.
CRUISE will be shown on the
combined instrument panel. The speed set
earlier is stored in the memory.
The cruise control is also temporarily disen-
gaged when:
the brake pedal is depressed
speed falls when travelling uphill to below
25-30 km/h
the gear selector is moved to position N
wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs.
Return to the set speed
Press this button to resume the
previously set speed.
CRUISE
ON
appears on the combined
instrument panel.
1
Depending on engine type.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
71
Disengaging
Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise
control.
CRUISE ON clears on the com-
bined instrument panel.
02 Instruments and controls
Parking brake, electrical socket, etc.
02
72
Parking brake
G026992
Parking brake, LHD car.
G026994
Parking brake, RHD car.
Parking brake pedal
Handle for releasing the parking brake
The parking brake is at floor level, see illustra-
tion, and acts on the rear wheels when
depressed.
NOTE
The warning symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel illuminates irrespective of how
hard the parking brake pedal is depressed.
How to apply the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Depress the parking brake pedal firmly as
far as possible.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake pedal
must be depressed further.
5. When parking the vehicle - select the trans-
mission's P position.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels
away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the
wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking
on a slope - the automatic transmission's
P position is not sufficient to hold the car in
all situations.
How to release the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the handle.
02 Instruments and controls
Parking brake, electrical socket, etc.
02
73
Electrical socket in the rear seat
G028425
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories, such as mobile phone chargers
and coolers. It is designed for 12 V. For the
socket to supply current, the remote control
key must be in at least position I.
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is
used at a time. If both sockets (in the centre
console and by the rear seat) are used at the
same time then 7.5 A (90 W) per socket
applies.
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sock-
ets then no other current consumers may be
connected to the other one.
NOTE
The compressor for emergency puncture
repair is tested and approved by Volvo. For
information about using Volvo's recom-
mended temporary mobility kit (TMK) for
emergency puncture repair, see page 188.
Steering wheel adjustment
G026999
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and reach. Press down the control on
the left-hand side of the steering column. Then
adjust the steering wheel to the position that
suits you best. Press the control back into
place to lock the steering wheel. If this is diffi-
cult, press the steering wheel slightly while
pressing the control back.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel before driving off,
never while driving. Check that the steering
wheel is fixed in position.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
74
Operating
The power windows are operated using the
controls in the doors. The key position must be
I or II for the power windows to operate. The
windows continue to work when the car has
stopped and the remote control key has been
removed, provided none of the doors is
opened. Operate the windows with caution.
To open a window:
Depress the front of the control.
To close a window:
Raise the front of the control.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Always remember to switch off the
power supply to the power windows by
removing the remote control key if the
driver leaves the car.
Make sure that children or other pas-
sengers cannot be trapped in any way
when closing the windows.
If the rear door windows are operated from
the driver's door - check that none of the
rear seat passengers is in danger of getting
their hands caught when closing the win-
dows.
Driver's door
Controls, power windows.
Front window controls
Rear window controls
The driver can operate all power windows from
the driver's seat. The windows can be opened
and closed in two ways:
Depress one of the controls (1) or (2) gently
or raise them. The power windows go up
or down as long as the switch is actuated.
Fully depress one of the controls (1) or (2)
or raise it, then release. The side window
will then open or close automatically. If the
window is obstructed by an object, the
movement will stop.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
75
NOTE
The function auto up for the passenger side
is only available in certain markets.
Blocking power windows in the rear
doors
G029572
Blocking rear power windows and electric child
safety locks*.
The power windows in the rear seat can be
blocked with the switch on the driver's door
control panel. Always remember to switch off
current to the power windows (i.e. remove the
remote control key) if you leave children in the
car unattended.
The light in the switch is illuminated
The rear door windows can only be operated
from the driver's door.
The light in the switch is extinguished
The rear door windows can be operated both
with the controls on each rear door and with
the controls on the driver's door.
Front passenger seat
G029573
The control for the power window at the front
passenger seat operates that window only.
Rear power windows
G029574
The rear door windows can be operated with
the controls on the doors and the switch on the
driver's door. If the light in the switch for block-
ing power windows in the rear doors (located
in the driver's door control panel) is illuminated,
the rear door windows can only be operated
from the driver's door.
WARNING
If the rear door windows are operated from
the driver's door, check that none of the rear
seat passengers are in danger of becoming
trapped in any way when they are closed.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
76
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Interior rearview mirror
G026660
Dimming
Normal position
Dimmed position.
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming when disturbed by light from behind.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror.
Interior rearview mirror with compass*
G026965
The upper left-hand corner of the rearview mir-
ror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car
is pointing. Eight different directions are shown
with English abbreviations:
N (north), NE (north
east),
E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
If the compass is activated then it starts auto-
matically in key position II or when the engine
is running. Switch the compass on or off by
pressing the button set into the rear of the mir-
ror. Use a straightened paper clip for example.
The button is countersunk
approximately 2.5 centimetres in the mirror.
Correct zone on compass
C
A
L
Z
O
N
E
C
A
L
Z
O
N
E
G026950
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is set for the geographical area
to which the car was delivered. The compass
should be calibrated if the car is moved across
several magnetic zones.
1.
Key position II.
2. Press and hold the button on the rear of the
mirror for approximately 3 seconds until
ZONE is shown (use a straightened paper
clip for example). The number for the cur-
rent area is shown.
3. Press the button several times until the
number for the required geographic area
(1–15) is shown. After several seconds the
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
``
77
display returns to show the compass direc-
tion, this means that the change of zone is
complete.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
78
Magnetic zones for the compass.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
79
Calibration
The compass may need calibrating to work
correctly. For best results, switch off all major
power consumers such as interior lighting,
ventilation fan, heated rear window etc. and
avoid having metal objects and magnetic
objects close to the mirror.
1. Stop the car in a wide open area with the
engine running.
2. Press and hold the button on the rear of the
rearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar)
until
CAL is shown again (approx. 6 sec-
onds).
3. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 8 km/h until
CAL disappears
from the display. Which is when calibration
is complete.
4. Alternative calibration method: Drive off as
usual.
CAL disappears from the display
when calibration is complete.
Door mirrors
G029575
The controls for adjusting the two door mirrors
are at the front of the driver's door armrest. The
rearview mirrors can be operated in key posi-
tion I and II.
1.
Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light on the button illumi-
nates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light
goes out.
Folding in the door mirrors, see page 59.
WARNING
Adjust the mirrors before you begin driving.
Door mirrors with memory function*
If the car has door mirrors with memory func-
tion, they work together with the memory set-
ting of the seat, see page 99.
Memory function in remote control*
When you unlock the car with one of the remote
controls and change the setting of the door
mirrors, these new settings are saved in the
remote control. The next time you unlock the
car with the same remote control and open the
driver's door within five minutes, the mirrors
will assume their stored positions.
Laminated side windows*
The laminated windows in the front and rear
doors improve sound insulation in the passen-
ger compartment and provide better protec-
tion against unauthorised entry.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
80
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Water and dirt-repellent coating on the
front side windows*
Side windows treated with the water
and dirt-repellent coating are marked
with a small symbol. For information on glass
care, see page 195.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice
from the windows. The water and dirt-repel-
lent coating could be damaged.
02 Instruments and controls
Power sunroof*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
Open positions
G007503
The sunroof controls are located in the roof
panel. The sunroof can be opened in two posi-
tions:
Ventilation position, up at the rear edge
Sliding position, backwards/forwards
The remote control key must be in position I or
II.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Switch off the supply to the power sunroof
by removing the remote control key if the
driver leaves the car.
Closing, automatic
Closing, manual
Opening, manual
Opening, automatic
Opening, ventilation position
Closing, ventilation position
Ventilation position
To open:
Press the rear edge of the control (E)
upward.
To close:
Pull the rear edge of the control (F) down-
ward.
Switch from ventilation position to comfort
position; pull the control rearward to its end
position (D) and release.
Automatic operation
Move the control over the resistance point
position (C) to the rearmost end position (D) or
over the resistance point position (B) to the
front end position (A) and release. The sunroof
will open to the comfort position or will close
completely.
In order to open from comfort position to maxi-
mum opening:
Pull the control to the rear once more to the
end position (D) and release.
Manual operation
To open:
Pull the control rearward to the point of
resistance (C). The sunroof moves toward
the fully open position as long as the button
is held depressed.
02 Instruments and controls
Power sunroof*
02
82
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
To close:
Press the control forward to the point of
resistance (B). The sunroof moves toward
the closed position as long as the button is
held depressed.
WARNING
The sunroof's pinch-protection function
only operates during automatic closing, not
manual.
Sunscreen
G020157
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto-
matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the
handle and slide the screen forward to close it.
Pinch protection
The sunroof's pinch protection function is acti-
vated if the hatch is blocked by an object. If
blocked, the sunroof will stop and automati-
cally open to the previous position.
WARNING
The sunroof's pinch protection function only
operates during automatic closing, not dur-
ing manual closing.
Make sure that nobody is in danger of
becoming trapped in any way when closing
the sunroof.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink
*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
83
General
G030070
HomeLink
1
is a programmable remote control
which can remotely control up to three different
devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm sys-
tem, outdoor lighting and indoor lighting etc.)
and in doing so replace their remote controls.
For more information on HomeLink
, visit:
www.homelink.com or ring
00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone
number, +49 6838 907 277).
WARNING
If HomeLink
is used to operate a
garage door or gate, make sure that
there is no-one in the vicinity of the door
or gate while it is moving.
The car should remain outside the
garage while a garage door opener is
being programmed.
Do not use HomeLink
for any garage
door that does not have safety stop and
safety reverse.
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. when changing to another
car or for use in another vehicle). It is also rec-
ommended that the programming for the but-
tons is deleted when the car is sold. See the
section "Resetting the HomeLink® buttons" on
page 84.
Programming HomeLink
NOTE
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position"
before HomeLink
can be programmed or
used. If possible, fit new batteries in the
remote control that shall be replaced by
HomeLink
for faster programming and
improved transmission of the radio signal.
The HomeLink
buttons should be reset
before programming. When this has been
done HomeLink
is set in "learn mode" and
ready for programming.
1. Aim the original remote control towards the
HomeLink
button to be programmed and
hold it 5-14 cm from the button. Do not
obstruct the indicator lamp on
HomeLink
.
2. Depress the button on the original remote
control and the button to be programmed
on HomeLink
simultaneously. Do not
release the buttons until the indicator lamp
has changed over from slow to rapid flash-
ing. Both the buttons must be released
when the indicator lamp flashes quickly.
1
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink
*
02
84
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3.
Depress the HomeLink
button being
programmed, hold it depressed for
5 seconds and then release it. Repeat if
necessary until the garage door is acti-
vated. If the door is not activated, press the
programmed HomeLink
button and hold
it depressed and check the indicator lamp.
>
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-
minates with a constant glow when the
button is kept depressed, this indicates
that the programming is complete.
The garage door, gate or similar should
now be activated when the pro-
grammed HomeLink
button is
depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds
and then changes over to a constant
glow. In which case, continue with the
programming steps 4-6 in order to com-
plete the programming of a device with
rolling code (usually a garage door
opener).
4.
Locate the "programming button
2
" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver.
5. Depress and release the receiver's "pro-
gramming button". The button flashes for
approx. 30 seconds and the next step must
be carried out within this period.
6. While the receiver's "programming button"
is still flashing, press the button on
HomeLink
being programmed and hold it
depressed for approx. 2 seconds and then
release it. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence up to 3 times to conclude the
programming.
Operation
When HomeLink
is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Press the programmed button and hold it
depressed until the garage door, alarm system,
etc. is activated (may take several seconds).
Naturally the original remote controls can still
be used in parallel with HomeLink
if required.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink
will
work for 30 minutes after the driver's door
has been opened.
If programming problems persist, contact
HomeLink
on: www.homelink.com or ring
00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone
number +49 6838 907 277).
Resetting the HomeLink
buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the
HomeLink
buttons at the same time, not each
button individually. However, individual but-
tons can be reprogrammed, see the following
section "Programming individual buttons".
1. Depress the two outer buttons on
HomeLink
and do not release until the
indicator lamp starts to flash.
2. Release the buttons.
>
HomeLink
is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be reprog-
rammed, see section "Programming
HomeLink®" on page 83.
2
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink
*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
85
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLink
button,
proceed as follows:
1.
Depress the required button and do not
release.
2.
When the indicator lamp on HomeLink
starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,
start with step 1 in section "Programming
HomeLink®" on page 83.
For more information or to leave comments
about HomeLink
, visit: www.homelink.com or
ring 00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate
phone number +49 6838 907 277).
86
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on climate control................................................... 88
Electronic Climate Control, ECC............................................................. 91
Fuel-driven parking heater*..................................................................... 94
CLIMATE CONTROL
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
03
88
Air conditioning
The climate control system cools or heats as
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment. The car is equipped with elec-
tronic climate control (ECC).
NOTE
The air conditioning can be switched off, but
to ensure the best possible air in the pas-
senger compartment and prevent the win-
dows from misting, it should always be on.
Misting windows
Reduce the problem of windows misting up on
the inside by cleaning the windows. Use a reg-
ular window cleaner.
Multi-filter
Make sure that the multi-filter/pollen filter is
replaced regularly. Volvo recommends you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control
system air intake (the grille between the bonnet
and the windscreen).
Ventilation fan function
When the engine is off (and if the remote con-
trol key is in position I or II), the ventilation fan
is automatically switched off. This is to prevent
the battery from becoming discharged.
To activate the ventilation fan, turn the fan con-
trol and set the desired speed.
ECC (electronic climate control)
Actual temperature
The temperature you select corresponds to the
physical experience with reference to factors
such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation
etc. in and around the car.
Sensor location
The sun sensor is on the top side of the
instrument panel.
The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is behind the climate control
panel.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Side windows and sunroof
To ensure that the air conditioning works sat-
isfactorily, the side windows, and sunroof if
appropriate, should be closed.
Acceleration
The air conditioning system switches off tem-
porarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel a
temporary rise in temperature.
Condensation
In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
To ventilate the climate system's control sys-
tem the ventilation fan can be started up to 50
minutes after the car's ignition has been
switched off. The fan is then switched off auto-
matically after approx. 15 minutes.
Fuel economy
With ECC, the air conditioning system is con-
trolled automatically and is used just enough to
cool the passenger compartment and to ade-
quately dehumidify the incoming air. This pro-
vides better fuel economy compared to con-
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
03
``
89
ventional systems where the air conditioning
cools the air to just above freezing point.
Air distribution
G028577
Incoming air is distributed through several dif-
ferent vents located throughout the car.
Air vents in the instrument panel
G027043
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow.
1. Aim the outer vents towards the side win-
dows to remove misting from the front side
windows.
2. In cold climates: close the centre vents for
the most comfortable climate and best
demisting.
Panel vents in the door pillar
0
G027064
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow.
1. Aim the outer vents toward the rear side
windows to remove misting.
2. Aim the vents inwards for a comfortable
climate in the rear seat.
Bear in mind that small children can be sensi-
tive to airflow and draughts.
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
03
90
Ventilated front seats (Executive)
G030244
Control for front seat ventilation.
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seat and backrest that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases
the cooler the passenger compartment air
becomes.
The ventilation is regulated from a control on
the control panel on the side of the front seats
which has three steps for the fan speed.
To start seat ventilation:
Press briefly on
.
To increase the ventilation in steps:
Press briefly on .
To obtain maximum ventilation:
Hold
depressed for about 2 seconds.
To decrease the ventilation in steps:
Press briefly on
.
To switch off the ventilation:
Hold depressed for about 2 seconds.
The ventilation can be used at the same time
as front seat heating. For example, the function
can be used to dry damp from clothing.
The ventilation system can be activated when
the engine is running.
NOTE
The seat ventilation should be used carefully
by people sensitive to draughts. Comfort
level I is recommended for long-term use.
IMPORTANT
The seat ventilation cannot be started when
passenger compartment temperature is
below 5 °C. This is to avoid chilling anyone
sitting in the seat.
Seat heating, outer rear seats
(Executive)
G030976
Button for rear seat heating, On/Off.
The seat heating in the rear seats is controlled
with a button control in accordance with the
illustration above. There is one control on each
side of the rear centre console for each respec-
tive rear seat.
To start seat heating:
Press the button.
> The symbol in the button illuminates.
To stop the heating:
Press the button.
> The lamp goes out.
03 Climate control
Electronic Climate Control, ECC
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
91
Control panel
AC – On/off (ON/OFF)
Recirculation/Multifilter with sensor*
Recirculation
AUTO
Air distribution
Passenger compartment temperature sen-
sor
Defroster, windscreen and side windows
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Heated front seats
Temperature, right-hand side
Temperature, left-hand side
Fan
Fan, rear passenger compartment*
Functions
1. AC – ON/OFF
ON: The air conditioning is on. It is controlled
by the system's AUTO function. This way,
incoming air is cooled and dehumidified.
OFF: When the defroster function is activated
the air conditioning is switched on automati-
cally (can be switched off using the AC button).
2. Air quality system, recirculation/
multifilter*
Certain cars are equipped with a "Multifilter"
and air quality sensor. The Multifilter separates
gases and particles, thus reducing the volume
of odours and pollutants. The air quality sensor
detects increased levels of contaminants in the
outside air. When the air quality sensor detects
contaminated outside air, the air intake is
closed and the air in the passenger compart-
ment is recirculated. The Multifilter also cleans
the air recirculating in the passenger compart-
ment.
03 Climate control
Electronic Climate Control, ECC
03
92
A green light (AUT) illuminates
in the button when the air qual-
ity sensor is active.
Operation:
Press AUTO to activate the air quality sen-
sor (normal setting).
Or:
Select one of the following three functions
by repeatedly pressing
:
The lamp for MAN illuminates. Recircu-
lation is now activated.
No lamp illuminates. Recirculation is not
activated unless needed to cool in a
warm climate.
The lamp for AUT illuminates. Recircu-
lation is now activated.
Keep the following in mind:
Make it a rule to have the air quality sensor
activated at all times.
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
avoid misting.
If misting occurs, you should deactivate
the air quality sensor.
If misting occurs, you can use the defroster
functions for the windscreen, side win-
dows and rear window.
Follow the Volvo service programme for
the recommended replacement interval of
the Multifilter. If the car is used in environ-
ments where more contaminants are pres-
ent, it may be necessary to change the
Multifilter more often.
3. Recirculation
Recirculation can be used to shut out bad air,
exhaust, etc. from the passenger compart-
ment. The air in the passenger compartment is
recirculated, i.e. no outside air is taken into the
car when this function is activated.
If you allow the air in the car to recirculate, there
is a risk of icing and misting, especially in win-
ter.
The timer function (cars with Multifilter and air
quality sensor have no timer function) mini-
mises the risk for ice, misting and bad air.
Activate the function as follows:
1.
Press
for more than 3 seconds. The
lamp flashes for 5 seconds. The air recir-
culates in the car for 3-12 minutes depend-
ing on the outside temperature.
2. The timer function is activated each time
you press
.
To switch off the timer function:
Press
again for more than 3 sec-
onds. The lamp illuminates for 5 seconds
to confirm your selection.
4. AUTO
The AUTO function automatically regulates cli-
mate control and maintains the selected tem-
perature. The automatic function controls
heating, air conditioning, air quality sensor, fan
speed, recirculation and air distribution. If you
select one or more manual functions, the other
functions continue to be controlled automati-
cally. All manual settings are switched off when
AUTO is switched on.
5. Air distribution
When the top button is depressed, air is
directed to the windows
When the centre button is depressed, air is
directed to the head and body
When the lower button is depressed, air is
directed to the legs and feet
Press AUTO to return to automatic air distri-
bution.
6. Passenger compartment temperature
sensor
The passenger compartment temperature sen-
sor monitors the temperature inside the car.
03 Climate control
Electronic Climate Control, ECC
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
93
7. Defroster, windscreen and side
windows
Used to quickly remove misting and ice from
the windscreen and side windows. Air flows to
the windows at high fan speed. The light in the
defroster button illuminates when the function
is active.
When the function is selected the following
also takes place to provide maximum dehu-
midification of the air in the passenger com-
partment:
the air conditioning (AC) is automatically
engaged (can be switched off with the AC
button).
recirculation is automatically disengaged.
When the defroster function
is switched
off the climate control system returns to the
previous settings.
8. Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Use this button to quickly remove misting and
ice from the rear window and door mirrors, see
page 61 for further information about this func-
tion.
9. Heated front seats
To activate front seat heating:
1. Press once: High heat – both lamps illumi-
nate.
2. Press once more: Low heat – one lamp illu-
minates.
3. Press once more: Heating switched off –
no lamps illuminate.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop adjusts the temperature.
10 and 11. Temperature selector
The two knobs can be used to set the tem-
perature for the passenger and driver's sides
of the car.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
12. Fan
Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan
speed. If AUTO is selected then fan speed is
regulated automatically. The previously set fan
speed is disengaged.
NOTE
If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the
fan indicator in the display goes out, the fan
and the air conditioning are switched off.
13. Fan, rear passenger compartment
(option in cars seating seven)
Fan speed can be increased or decreased by
turning the knob. This only applies if AC is
selected for both front and rear* passenger
compartment. The button for rear passenger
compartment is in the centre console switch
panel, see page 59.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven parking heater*
03
94
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information about heaters
READ button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
The electrical system must be "awakened"
before the parking heater can be programmed.
This is done by:
pressing the READ button or
activating main beam or
turn the remote control key to key position
I.
The parking heater can be started immediately
or set with two different start times using
TIMER 1 and TIMER 2. Here, time refers to the
time when the car is heated and ready. The
car's electronic system calculates when heat-
ing should be started based on the outside
temperature.
The heater is not run if the outside temperature
exceeds 25 °C. At -10 °C and below, the maxi-
mum running time of the parking heater is 60
minutes.
If the parking heater does not start, despite
repeated attempts, Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop. A
message is shown in the display.
Warning decal on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the parking
heater is used.
Switch off the parking heater before refuel-
ling. Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Check in the display that the parking heater
is off. (When the parking heater is running,
PARK HEAT ON is shown in the display.)
Messages in the display
Once the settings for TIMER 1, TIMER 2 and
Direct Start is activated are activated, the
amber warning symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel illuminates and explanatory text is
shown in the display.
When you leave the car, you will receive a mes-
sage regarding the current settings of the sys-
tem. The message disappears when the car is
locked from the outside using the remote con-
trol key.
Parking on a hill
If you park your car on a steep incline, the front
of the car should be facing down the slope to
ensure the supply of fuel to the parking heater.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven parking heater*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
95
Clock/timer
If the car clock is reset after the heater timers
are programmed, the selected times will be
cancelled.
Setting the TIMER
For safety reasons, you can only programme
times for the following 24 hours, not several
days in advance.
1.
Scroll using the thumbwheel until
TIMER
1
or 2 is shown in the display.
2.
Briefly press RESET so that the hours set-
ting starts to flash.
3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to the desired
hour.
4.
Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-
ing minutes setting.
5. Scroll with the thumbwheel to the desired
minute.
6.
Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
7.
Press RESET to activate the timer.
Deactivating timer-started parking
heater
Proceed as follows to manually switch off the
parking heater before the set time has elapsed:
1.
Press READ.
2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text
PARK HEAT TIMER 1 or 2. The text ON
flashes on the display.
3.
Press RESET. The text
OFF is shown with
a constant glow and the parking heater is
switched OFF.
Direct start
1.
Scroll with the thumbwheel until
DIRECT
START
is shown in the display.
2.
Press RESET to access the options
ON or
OFF.
3.
Select
ON.
The heater will now run for 60 minutes. Heating
of the passenger compartment will begin as
soon as the engine coolant has reached a tem-
perature of 30 °C.
Immediate stop of heater
1.
Scroll with the thumbwheel until
DIRECT
START
is shown in the display.
2.
Press RESET to access options
ON or
OFF.
3.
Select
OFF.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the
parking heater is still running.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
level is too low, the parking heater will be
switched off automatically. A message is
shown in the display. Acknowledge the mes-
sage by pressing READ once.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater com-
bined with short journeys may discharge the
battery and impair starting. If the heater is
used regularly, the car must be driven for the
same time as the heater is used in order to
ensure that the alternator has time to charge
the battery.
Additional heater (diesel)*
Extra heat from the additional heater may be
required in cold weather to reach the correct
temperature in the passenger compartment.
The additional heater starts automatically
when extra heat is required if the engine is run-
ning. It is switched off automatically when the
correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
96
Front seats.............................................................................................. 98
Front seats - Executive ........................................................................ 101
Interior lighting...................................................................................... 102
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment................................... 104
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment - Executive ............... 109
Rear seat............................................................................................... 110
Loading................................................................................................. 112
Cargo area............................................................................................ 113
INTERIOR
04 Interior
Front seats
04
98
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seating position
G027960
The driver's and passenger seats can be
adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving
positions.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and ped-
als. Check that the seat is locked after
changing position.
Raise/lower the front of the seat cushion,
pump up/down, (driver's and passenger
side*).
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down,
(driver's and passenger side*).
Lumbar support
1
, turn the wheel.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Control panel for power seat*.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving.
Check that the seat is locked in position.
Tipping the front seat backrest
G014805
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
1. Move the seat as far back as possible.
2. Adjust the backrest to an upright position
90 degrees.
3. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
while folding it forwards.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is
properly locked after being folded up in
order to avoid personal injury in the event of
sudden braking or an accident.
Inlay mats*
Volvo supplies inlay mats which are especially
produced for your car.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
1
Also applies to power seat.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
99
Power seat*
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote con-
trol key without the key being inserted into the
ignition switch. The seat can always be
adjusted in ignition position I or II.
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat, forwards/backwards
Seat, up/down
Backrest rake
An overload protection is deployed if one of the
seats is blocked. If this happens, turn off the
ignition and wait a short time before adjusting
the seat again. Only one of the seat's settings
can be adjusted at a time.
Memory function*
Buttons for memory function.
Store setting
1. Adjust seat.
2.
Press and hold button MEM while pressing
button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.
Using a stored setting
Press one of the memory buttons 13 until the
seat stops. If you release the button then the
movement of the seat will stop.
Key memory in remote control key
All remote control keys can be used by differ-
ent drivers to store the settings for the driver's
seat and door mirrors
2
. Proceed as follows:
Adjust the seat as you want it.
Lock the car by pressing the lock button on
the remote control key that you normally
use. This stores the positions of the seat
and door mirrors in the remote control
key's memory
3
.
Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock but-
ton on the same remote control key) and
open the driver's door. The driver's seat
and door mirrors will automatically adopt
the positions that are stored in the remote
control key's memory (if the seat has been
moved since you locked the car).
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the setting buttons for the seat or mem-
ory buttons in order to stop the seat.
2
Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.
3
This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
100
WARNING
Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do
not play with the controls.
Check that there are no objects in front of,
behind or under the seat during adjustment.
Ensure that none of the backseat passen-
gers will be trapped.
04 Interior
Front seats - Executive
04
101
Comfort seats, front
G030180
Massage
Lumbar
Massage
G030183
Button for activating massage.
Hard massage
Soft massage
Each front seat has massage in the backrest.
The massage is performed by air cushions that
can massage with either a hard or soft setting.
When one of the settings is selected the mas-
sage is carried out in accordance with the
cycle: massage 6 minutes - pause 4 minutes -
massage 6 minutes etc.
When the button is in the centre position, or
when the remote control key is in position 0,
massage is not activated.
Setting lumbar
G030229
Button for setting lumbar.
The lumbar support is set with the same air
cushions used for massage. Adjustment can
be made steplessly both in terms of depth and
height using the control button, see the illus-
tration above.
The lumbar support can be set when massage
is not active.
A memory function recalls the lumbar sup-
port's setting when massage is stopped or
when the pressure in the air cushions has
decreased, e.g. after a longer period of park-
ing.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
102
Reading lamps and interior lighting
G026960
Controls in roof console for front reading lamps
and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp left-hand front
Interior lighting
Reading lamp right-hand front
Passenger compartment lighting
1
is switched
on with a short press on button (2), at the same
time automatic lighting is activated, see
page 103. Passenger compartment lighting is
switched off with a short press on button (2).
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on in ignition position I and II as
well as when the engine is running. The lighting
can also be activated within 10 minutes after:
the engine has been switched off and the
ignition is in position 0
the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started
Following which, it is switched off automati-
cally.
Front roof lighting
The front reading lamps are switched on or off
by pressing the relevant button in the roof con-
sole.
Rear roof lighting
G027153
Rear reading lamps
Reading lamp left-hand rear, On/Off
Reading lamp right-hand rear, On/Off
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing
the relevant button.
There are also reading lamps for the third row
of seats in cars that seat seven.
Courtesy lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-
ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-
tively when a side door is opened or closed.
1
Courtesy lighting follows passenger compartment lighting.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
103
Cargo area lighting
The cargo area has a lamp on the inside of the
tailgate.
The rear lamp in the passenger compartment
and the lamp in the tailgate are switched on
and off respectively when the tailgate is
opened or closed.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror*
G027045
The light illuminates automatically when the
cover is lifted.
Automatic lighting
Automatic lighting can be disengaged by
pressing button (2), see page 102, and holding
it depressed for more than 3 seconds. A short
press on the button re-engages automatic
lighting.
When automatic lighting is activated the pas-
senger compartment lighting is switched on
automatically
2
and remains on for 30 seconds:
the car is unlocked with the key or remote
control key
the engine is switched off and the key is
turned to the 0 position.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
on and remains on for 10 minutes if one of the
doors is open and the passenger compartment
lighting is not switched off.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
the engine is started
the car is locked with the key or remote
control key.
The programmed times, 30 seconds and
10 minutes, can be changed by a Volvo work-
shop.
2
The function is light-dependent and is only activated when it is dark.
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
104
Storage spaces
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
105
Storage compartment in third row of seats
Storage compartment and cup holder
Ticket clip
Glovebox
Storage tray in centre console
Cup holder for rear seat passengers
Storage pocket (also on the front edge of
the front seat cushions)
Bag holder
WARNING
Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects
lie or protrude in such a way that they could
cause injury during heavy braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with
a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Pen holder
G027030
The centre console contains a pen holder.
Glovebox
ATTENTION
Pakjdskdl ioiuip kjöpp opoodidåuswi
C
SOUND
MENU
80
ENTER
L
S
E
E
EXIT
MY KEY
R
T
O
AIRBAG
G027025
The glovebox can be used to store things such
as the owner's manual, maps, pens and petrol
cards.
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
106
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Coat hanger
G027028
The coat hanger is only intended for light gar-
ments.
Ashtray for rear seat passengers*
G027018
Open the ashtray by pulling the top edge out-
ward.
To empty:
1. Open the ashtray.
2. Press the cover outwards and tip it back.
3. Then lift it out.
Cup holder/bottle holder for rear seat
passengers
G027063
Pull the bottom edge of the insert to open.
The cup holder insert can be removed:
Detach the two clips so the holder can be
used for large bottles.
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
107
Storage compartment and cup holder
(cars seating seven)
G027040
This storage compartment can be used for
CDs, books and the like.
Storage tray in centre console
G027019
The centre console contains a storage tray for
food and drinks, for example. The armrest can
be folded back to make a "table" for rear seat
passengers.
Under the storage tray is a storage compart-
ment, e.g. for CD discs.
Cup holder
G027020
Cup holder for front seat passengers.
Ashtray*
Pull out the insert to empty the astray.
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
108
Storage compartment in the third row
of seats (cars seating seven)
G027026
This storage compartment can be used for
pens and other small items.
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment - Executive
04
109
Cooler box
G027068
There is a cooler box under front seat's folding
armrest. Adjust the cooling level with the but-
ton (see illustration). The cooler box works
when the engine is running or in key position
II.
WARNING
Store bottles well sealed in the cooler box
and make sure that the door is closed for the
journey.
04 Interior
Rear seat
04
110
Rear seats – second row (cars seating
seven)
G027027
Lowering the backrest for entry into the
car
Lift the handle (1) up while pushing the seat
forward. Do the reverse to return the seat to its
original position.
Adjusting the seat front - rear
Lift the bracket (2) to move the seat forwards
or backwards.
Sliding seat (cars seating seven)
G027033
The centre seat in the second row can be slid
farther forward than the other seats. Sliding the
seat completely forward improves contact
between a child sitting on the integrated
booster cushion and front seat occupants.
Lift the bracket (A) to move the seat forwards
or backwards.
Removing the rear section of the
centre console
G028445
The centre console must first be removed if you
wish to slide the centre seat in the second row
forward.
1. Remove the rear section of the centre con-
sole by pulling the catch straight out as
illustrated above.
2. Then lift the console out of the way.
04 Interior
Rear seat
04
111
Head restraint, rear seat – centre seat
G027015
The centre seat head restraint can be adjusted
to four different heights. Raise the head
restraint as necessary.
To lower the head restraint again, the but-
ton by the right-hand shaft must be
pressed in while the head restraint is
pressed down carefully. See illustration.
WARNING
The lowest position should only be used
when the backrest is to be folded down or
when no one is sitting in this seat.
After raising the backrests in the second
and third row, it is important to make sure
that the backrests have locked into position.
Otherwise the protective system of the
seats may be compromised.
NOTE
The head restraint cannot be removed com-
pletely.
04 Interior
Loading
04
112
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a
corresponding weight. For more detailed infor-
mation on weights, see page 280.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Load on the roof
Load carriers
Load carriers designed by Volvo are recom-
mended in order to avoid damaging the car and
for maximum possible safety while driving.
Carefully follow the mounting instructions
enclosed with the load carriers.
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the load's size.
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
Load no more than 100 kg on the roof, inclu-
sive of the load carriers or space box. The
car's centre of gravity and driving characte-
ristics are altered by roof loads.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
113
Extension, cargo area - seat row 2
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either.
Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the
rear seat upholstery.
G027022
1.
Set the seats in their rearmost positions
1
.
2. Lower the head restraint.
3. Release the catch (1) and fold down the
backrest. Press down to lock the backrest
in its folded position.
WARNING
For reasons of safety, no passengers should
sit in the third row of seats if the outer head
restraints in the second row are lowered.
Extension, cargo area - seat row 3
1
G027016
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either.
Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the
rear seat upholstery.
Push the second row of seats to its front posi-
tion - see page 98.
Lift the handle upward.
Slide the seat cushion to its rearmost posi-
tion. Fold in the right and left-hand cargo
eyes in order to avoid damage when low-
ering the backrest.
Fold down the backrest. (The head
restraint folds in automatically when the
backrest is folded).
Resetting seat row 3
1. Raise the backrest to its normal position.
2. Take hold of the eyes and pull out the seat
cushion until a "click" sounds.
3. Raise the head restraint.
> The seat is now ready for use.
1
Only cars seating seven
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
114
General
Opening the tailgate
For information about how the tailgate is
opened - see page 126.
Loading the cargo area
G027031
The seatbelts and airbags provide the driver
and passengers substantial protection, espe-
cially in frontal collisions. However, you must
also remember to protect yourself against inju-
ries from behind. When loading cargo, bear in
mind that improperly secured or incorrectly
loaded objects in the cargo area could be
thrown forward with great speed and force in
the event of a collision or sudden braking,
causing serious injuries.
Bear in mind that if an object weighing 20 kg is
subjected to a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h, its impact weight will be 1000 kg.
Think about the following when loading:
Do not load extremely heavy objects up by
the front seats. The lowered backrest will
be pressed down unnecessarily hard.
Place the load by the backrest.
Position heavy loads as low as possible.
Position wide loads on each side of the
division in the backrest.
Cover sharp edges with something soft.
Secure the load with retaining straps using
the car's lashing eyes.
Never load above the backrest without a
load net.
WARNING
The driving characteristics of the car change
based on the car's kerb weight and how
heavily it is loaded.
WARNING
Never load cargo above the backrests! If
you do so, the load could be thrown forward
in the event of sudden braking or a collision
and severely injure you or your passengers.
Remember to always secure (bind) the load
properly.
If the rear seat backrest is lowered, do not
load the car higher than 50 mm under the
top edge of the rear passenger windows.
Leave 10 cm of free space from the win-
dows inwards. Otherwise, the intended pro-
tection of the inflatable curtain, which is hid-
den in the headlining, may be compro-
mised.
Always secure the load. Always secure the
load. During heavy braking the load may
otherwise shift, causing personal injury to
the car's occupants.
Turn off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading or unloading long
objects! Otherwise you may accidentally
knock the gear lever or gear selector with
the load and cause a gear to engage and the
car to move off.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
``
115
Safety net
G027058
The safety net prevents luggage and cargo
from being thrown forward in the passenger
compartment during heavy braking.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and
can be secured two different ways:
Behind the rear seat backrest
Behind the front seats if the rear seat is
lowered.
Fitting the safety net
If the car is equipped with a cargo area cover,
remove it before fitting the safety net.
1. Hook the upper rod in the front or rear roof
mounting.
2. Hook the other end of the rod in the roof
mounting on the other side.
3. Secure the safety net anchoring straps in
the eyes on the floor if the net is secured in
the rear roof mountings.
4. Use the eyes in the seat slide rail if the net
is secured in the front roof mountings.
Only applies to cars seating seven:
1. Make sure the net lies in front of the side
panel armrest when securing.
2. Tension the safety net using the anchoring
straps.
Folding up the safety net
The safety net can be folded up and placed in
the cargo area floor (for cars seating five).
Press the buttons (1) in the safety net
hinges to release the hinges and fold up the
net.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
116
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Make sure that the upper mountings of the
safety net are correctly fitted and that the
anchoring straps are securely fastened.
Do not use a damaged net.
Steel safety grille*
G027056
The protective grille in the cargo area prevents
cargo or pets from being thrown forward in the
passenger compartment in the event of heavy
braking.
For reasons of safety, the protective grille must
always be mounted and secured correctly.
Fit the protective grille as follows:
1. Lift in the protective grille through the tail-
gate opening or one of the rear doorways
(fold down the seats in the second row if
necessary).
2. Insert one of the protective grille mountings
in its bracket above the rear door behind
the second row of seats.
G027057
3. Slide the protective grille mounting to the
front position of the bracket.
4. Place the other protective grille mounting
in its bracket above the other rear door and
slide it to the front position.
5. Insert the attaching brace through the
lower mounting in the protective grille from
underneath, as indicated in the illustration.
6. Fit the spring on the attaching brace and
screw in the knob.
7. Fit the hook from the attaching brace in the
load securing eyelet and tighten the knob
until the attaching brace takes hold in the
load securing eyelet.
8. Do the same on the other side.
9. Tighten both attaching braces alternately.
10. Fit protective caps on the exposed screw
threads above the knobs.
WARNING
For cars seating seven: For reasons of
safety, no passengers should sit in the third
row of seats if the protective grille is posi-
tioned behind the second row of seats.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
117
Electrical socket in cargo area
Slide down the cover when you wish to use the
socket. It works regardless of whether the igni-
tion is on or off.
If the ignition is switched off and a power con-
sumer that uses more than 0.1 A is connected
to the electric socket, a warning message is
shown in the display.
IMPORTANT
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket
with the engine switched off involves the
risk of discharging the car's battery.
NOTE
The compressor for emergency puncture
repair is tested and approved by Volvo. For
information about using Volvo's recom-
mended temporary mobility kit (TMK) for
emergency puncture repair, see page 188.
Cargo cover*
Pull out the cargo area cover, pull it over the
cargo and hook it into the holes in the rear pil-
lars of the cargo area.
Removing the cargo area cover
Press the end pieces of the cargo area cover
inwards, pull up and release. When fitting,
press the end pieces of the cargo area cover
down into the holders.
WARNING
Do not place objects on the cargo area
cover. They could injure passengers during
braking or evasive manoeuvres.
Bag holder*
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
118
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Open the hatch in the cargo area. Hang or
secure your grocery bags using the tensioning
straps or holders.
Cargo area compartment, contents
Location of first aid kit in cars seating five.
Location of first aid kit in cars seating
seven.
The following is housed in the floor compart-
ment:
Warning triangle*
Tool kit
First aid kit*
Jack (alternative location)
NOTE
Some components of the first-aid kit have
an expiration date and should be replaced
before this date.
Opening the compartment in the cargo
area floor (cars seating five)
Lift up the cover in the cargo area floor.
If the car is equipped with a carrier bag holder:
Lift the cover, detach the tensioning straps
to the grocery bag holder.
Opening the compartment in the cargo
area floor (cars seating seven)
Lift up the cover.
If the car is equipped with a carrier bag holder:
Open the upper cover, detach the tension-
ing straps to the grocery bag holder, if fit-
ted, and open the lower cover.
IMPORTANT
Remember not to put anything in the area
that the cushions fold into. The cushions
and seat mechanisms could be damaged.
04 Interior
04
119
120
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key - key with remote control...................................... 122
Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 124
Child safety locks.................................................................................. 128
Alarm*.................................................................................................... 129
LOCKS AND ALARM
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key - key with remote control
05
122
Keys – Electronic immobiliser
G030177
Remote control key. This key opens all locks.
The car is supplied with two remote control
keys - they are collapsible and equipped with
built on remote control.
Loss of key
If you should lose one of your remote control
keys, you are recommended to bring the
remaining keys to an authorised Volvo work-
shop. The code of the missing key must be
erased from the system as a theft prevention
measure. The other keys must be re-coded in
the system at the same time.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-
ommended when ordering new key blades.
A maximum of six remote control keys can be
programmed and used for one single car.
Immobiliser
The keys are fitted with coded chips. The code
must be accepted by the reader (receiver) in
the ignition switch. The car can only be started
if the correct key with the correct code is used.
NOTE
The key blade on the remote control key
must be fully extended (as illustrated) when
starting the car. Otherwise there is a risk that
the immobiliser function will prevent the car
from starting.
Ignition keys and electronic immobiliser
The remote control key must not hang with
other keys or metal objects on the same key
ring. The electronic immobiliser could be acti-
vated erroneously and the car will not start.
Remote control functions
G027013
Unlocking
Press the button once to unlock all doors,
the tailgate and the fuel filler flap simulta-
neously.
Tailgate
Press the button once to unlock the tail-
gate.
Panic function
Panic function - Can be used to attract atten-
tion in an emergency. Press and hold the red
button for at least 3 seconds or press it 2 times
within the same space of time to activate the
direction indicators and the horn. The panic
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key - key with remote control
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
123
alarm is deactivated automatically after 25 sec-
onds or by pressing any of the buttons on the
remote control key.
Approach light duration
Do the following when you approach the car:
Press the yellow button on the remote con-
trol key.
The interior lighting, position/parking lamps,
number plate lighting, door mirror lamps* will
now switch on. The lighting on a coupled trailer
will also switch on. These lamps remain lit for
30, 60 or 90 seconds. A suitable time setting
can be made at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
To extinguish the approach lighting:
Press the yellow button again.
Locking
Lock all doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap with
the button. There is a delay of approx.
10 minutes for the fuel filler flap.
Folding/opening key
The remote control key can be folded by press-
ing the button and folding the key blade section
into the keypad at the same time.
The folding key will open automatically with
one press of the button.
Replacing the remote control key's
battery
Replace the battery after repeated failure by
the locks to respond when remote control key
signals are transmitted within a normal dis-
tance.
1. Remove the cover by carefully prising up
the rear edge of with a small screwdriver.
2. Replace the battery (type CR 2032, 3 V) –
with the plus side facing up. Avoid touch-
ing the battery and its terminals with your
fingers.
3. Refit the cover. Make sure the rubber seal
is properly fitted and free from damage to
prevent water from entering.
4. Return the old battery to your Volvo work-
shop so that it is disposed of in an envi-
ronmentally safe manner.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
124
From the outside
G026963
The remote control key locks/unlocks all doors
and the tailgate simultaneously.
The fuel filler flap can be opened when the car
is unlocked. It remains unlocked for 10 minutes
after the car has been locked - this is in order
to enable refuelling with the car locked and the
alarm armed.
NOTE
The car can be locked even if a door or the
tailgate is open
1
- when the door/tailgate is
then closed there is a risk that the keys will
be locked in.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside using
the remote control key - it is then not pos-
sible to open any of the doors from the
inside with the door controls. Read more
about this in the section "Deadlocks" later
on.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking with the remote
control key then all are locked again automat-
ically. This function prevents the car from being
left unlocked unintentionally.
For cars with alarms, see page 129.
Automatic locking
G029646
Automatic locking is activated and deactivated
from the driver's door control panel. The func-
tion operates by locking the doors automati-
cally when the speed of the car exceeds
7 km/h. They remain locked until a door is
opened from the inside or when all doors are
unlocked from the control panel.
Activation/Deactivation
The remote control key must be in key position
I or II, see page 143.
1
Not in all markets.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
125
Press the left-hand stalk switch READ but-
ton to acknowledge any messages on the
display.
Press and hold the button for central lock-
ing until a new message for lock status is
shown in the display.
The messages
AUTOLOCK ON (the car is
also locked when it moves) and
AUTOLOCK
OFF
respectively are shown on the display.
From the inside
G029646
All the doors and the tailgate can be locked or
unlocked simultaneously using the control
panel in the driver's door (or passenger door).
All doors can be locked using the lock button
on the control panel by each respective door.
Glovebox
ATTENTION
Pakjdskdl ioiuip kjöpp opoodidåuswi
C
SOUND
MENU
80
ENTER
L
S
E
E
EXIT
MY KEY
R
T
O
AIRBAG
G027025
The glovebox can be locked with the remote
control key's key blade.
Tailgate
G028485
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed and
the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the
remote control key.
1.
Press the remote control key's
button
- the tailgate is unlocked and can then be
opened.
> The alarm's* level and movement sen-
sors and the sensor for opening the tail-
gate are disconnected. The doors con-
tinue to remain locked and their alarms
armed.
2. If all doors continue to be locked when you
re-close the tailgate, the tailgate remains
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
126
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
unlocked and its alarm is not armed after
being closed. The other doors continue to
remain locked with their alarms armed.
3. To lock the tailgate and arm the alarm as
well - press the remote control key's
LOCK button.
NOTE
If the button is used to unlock the tail-
gate without it being opened then it is
relocked automatically after about 2
minutes.
Opening the tailgate
G027005
1. Open the tailgate by pulling down its han-
dle as illustrated.
2. The rear flap is folded down when its han-
dle is lifted up.
Deadlocks*
2
Deadlocks means that the opening handles for
the doors in the passenger compartment are
mechanically disengaged - the doors cannot
therefore be opened from the inside.
The deadlocks function is activated from the
outside with the remote control key's LOCK
button, or by locking the driver's door with the
key blade, and is set after a 10-25 second delay
after the doors have been locked. All doors
must be closed before deadlocks can be acti-
vated.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock
state with the remote control key's UNLOCK
button. The driver's door can also be unlocked
manually with the key blade.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
Temporary deactivation
G027230
Button for temporary disengagement of dead-
locks.
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off.
1. Insert the remote control key into the igni-
tion switch, turn it to key position II and
then back to position I or 0.
2. Press the button. Note that the alarm's*
movement and tilt detectors are switched
off at the same time, see page 130.
2
Not in all markets and only in combination with alarm.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
127
The lamp in the button illuminates until the car
is locked with the remote control key. A mes-
sage is shown on the display as long as the
remote control key remains in the ignition
switch.
Next time the engine is started the system is
reset to zero and the deadlocks function and
the alarm's movement and tilt detectors are
then re-engaged.
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
05 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
05
128
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Manual child safety locks – rear doors
The controls for the child safety locks are
located in the rear edge of the rear doors. The
controls are only accessible when the rear
doors are open.
Controls
G021513
Controls for the child safety locks – left and right-
hand rear doors.
Adjust the control in the respective rear door
by turning it between the outer positions (use
a flat metal object, such as a screwdriver).
Child-safe position – the rear doors cannot
be opened from inside: Turn outwards.
Not child-safe position – the rear doors can
be opened from inside: Turn inwards.
Electric child safety locks – rear side
doors*
REAR
AC
G027105
Use the button in the centre console to acti-
vate/deactivate the child safety locks in the
rear doors.
1.
Turn the ignition key to position I or II, see
page 143.
2. Press the button.
When the light in the button illuminates, the
rear power windows and rear doors are locked.
A message appears on the display, the child
safety locks are activated/deactivated.
NOTE
As long as the child safety lock is activated
the rear doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
129
Alarm system
When the alarm is armed, it continually moni-
tors all alarm inputs.
The alarm is triggered if:
a door, the bonnet or tailgate opens
a non-approved key is used in the ignition
or if an attempt is made to force the lock
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector)
a battery cable is disconnected
anyone tries to disconnect the siren.
NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also regis-
tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered
if the car is left with a window or the sunroof
open or if the passenger compartment
heater is used.
To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof
when leaving the car. If the car's integrated
passenger compartment heater (or a porta-
ble electric heater) shall be used - direct the
airflow from the air vents so that they are not
pointing upwards in the passenger com-
partment.
Alarm indicator
G026963
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
LED not lit – the alarm is not armed.
The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed.
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the
alarm and until the remote control key is
turned to key position II – the alarm has
been triggered.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, a message
appears on the display. In which case, contact
a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm
system components. All such attempts
could affect the terms of insurance.
Arming the alarm
Press the remote control key's LOCK but-
ton. A long flash from the car's direction
indicators confirms that the alarm is armed
and that all the doors are locked.
IMPORTANT
The alarm is fully armed when the car's
direction indicators have made one long
flash and the LED on the instrument panel
flashes once every other second.
Disarming the alarm
Press the remote control key's UNLOCK
button. Two short flashes from the car's
direction indicators confirm that the alarm
has been deactivated.
> For manual disarming - see the follow-
ing section "Deactivating a triggered
alarm".
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
130
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Automatic alarm activation
This function prevents you accidentally leaving
the car without the alarm on.
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of disarming the alarm (and
the car has been unlocked with the remote
control key), the alarm is automatically
rearmed. The car is locked at the same time.
Automatic alarm activation
In certain countries the alarm is activated after
a certain delay if the driver's door was opened
and closed but the car was not re-locked.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
Press the remote control key's UNLOCK
button or insert it into the ignition switch.
Confirmation is given by two short flashes from
the direction indicators.
Remote control key not working
If the alarm cannot be deacti-
vated with the remote control
key, e.g. if the key's battery is
discharged - the car can be
unlocked, disarmed and the
engine started as follows:
1. Unlock the driver's door manually and
open it - The alarm is triggered and the
siren sounds.
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch - The alarm is deactivated.
> The alarm indicator flashes rapidly until
the remote control key is turned to key
position II.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-
pens:
A siren sounds for 25 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its own
battery and works independently of the car
battery.
The direction indicators flash for
5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.
Reduced alarm level
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -
e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during
transport on a car train or car ferry - temporarily
deactivate the movement and tilt detectors.
The procedure is the same as with the tempo-
rary disengaging of deadlocks - see page 126.
05 Locks and alarm
05
131
132
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 134
Refuelling.............................................................................................. 137
Starting the engine................................................................................ 143
Automatic gearbox................................................................................ 145
All-wheel drive*..................................................................................... 148
Brake system........................................................................................ 149
Stability and traction control system*................................................... 151
Park assist syst*.................................................................................... 153
Blind Spot Information System - BLIS*................................................. 155
Towing and recovery............................................................................. 159
Jump starting........................................................................................ 161
Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 163
Towing equipment* .............................................................................. 165
Detachable towbar* ............................................................................. 167
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................................................................. 171
STARTING AND DRIVING
06 Starting and driving
General
06
134
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving
style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
Avoid driving with open windows.
Do not use winter tyres when the winter
season is over.
Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
and heavy braking.
Remove unnecessary items from the car -
the greater the load the higher the fuel con-
sumption.
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted
to the current traffic situation and road -
lower engine speeds result in lower fuel
consumption.
A roof load and ski box increase air resis-
tance, leading to higher fuel consumption
- remove the load carriers when not in use.
Do not run the engine to operating tem-
perature at idling speed, but rather drive
with a light load as soon as possible - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
For more information and further advice, see
the pages 13 and 287.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maxi-
mum depth of 40 cm at a maximum speed of
10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
In greater depths, water can enter the trans-
mission. This reduces the lubricating ability
of the oils and shortens the service life of the
systems.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
NOTE
Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling
after driving in water and mud.
IMPORTANT
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time. This could
cause electrical malfunctions.
In the event of engine stop in water do not
try restart. Tow the car from the water.
Engine, gearbox and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example hard
driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
a risk that the engine and drive system may
overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
In the event of a risk of overheating a built-
in protection function in the gearbox is acti-
vated which, amongst other things, illumi-
nates the instrument panel's yellow infor-
mation lamp and there is a text message
displayed there regarding appropriate
action - follow the recommendation given.
If the temperature gauge for the engine's
cooling system goes into the red zone -
06 Starting and driving
General
06
135
stop and let the engine idle for a few
minutes.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
For supplementary information about over-
heating when driving with a trailer - see
page 163.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a while after the engine has been
switched off.
IMPORTANT
The operating temperature of the gearbox is
checked in order to prevent damage to any
of the drive system's components. In the
event of a risk of overheating a warning
symbol illuminates on the instrument panel
combined with a text message - In which
case, follow the recommendation given.
Open tailgate
WARNING
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic
exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Do not overload the battery
The electrical functions in the car load the bat-
tery to varying degrees. Avoid having the
remote control key in key position II when the
engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode
- which uses less power.
Note that the 12 volt outlet in the cargo area
supplies power even when the remote control
key has been removed from the ignition switch.
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions
which use a lot of power when the engine is
switched off. Examples of such functions are:
ventilation fan
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume)
headlamps.
If the battery voltage is low the information dis-
play shows the text
LOW BATTERY POWER
SAVE MODE
. The energy-saving function
then shuts down certain functions or reduces
certain functions such as the ventilation fan
and/or audio system.
In which case, charge the battery by star-
ting the engine and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - battery charging is more
effective during driving than running the
engine at idling speed while stationary.
Driving on rough roads
The Volvo XC90 is primarily designed for driv-
ing on main roads, but also has good handling
properties on uneven or rough roads. Keep the
following in mind in order to preserve the serv-
ice life of your car:
Drive slowly on rough roads - this avoids
damaging the car's underbody.
If the ground is loose or is made up of dry
sand or snow, it is always best to keep the
car moving at all times and avoid shifting.
Do not stop the car.
If the road is extremely steep and there is
a risk of overturning - never try to turn the
car around. Reverse back down instead.
Do not drive diagonally across an incline -
drive in the direction of the incline.
06 Starting and driving
General
06
136
NOTE
Avoid driving on steep slopes if the fuel level
is low. The catalytic converter could be
damaged if the engine does not receive
enough fuel. When driving on extremely
steep slopes, make sure the tank is more
than half full to avoid the risk of breakdown.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
137
Opening the fuel filler flap
G027073
The fuel filler cap is inside the fuel filler flap on the
right-hand rear wing and hangs up on the inside of
the fuel filler flap.
The fuel filler flap can be opened when the car
is unlocked.
NOTE
The filler flap remains unlocked for ten
minutes after the car is locked. It then locks
automatically.
Emergency unlocking of the fuel filler
flap
Manual unlocking of the fuel filler flap may be
necessary if it cannot be opened normally. Pro-
ceed as follows:
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
138
Steps 1–3.
1. Lift up the corner piece from the floor in the
rear right-hand corner of the cargo area.
2. Open the fuel filler flap by lifting up the
handle and pulling it out.
3. Fold aside the insulation in order to access
the flap's electrical lock.
Steps 4–5.
4. Insert your hand and locate the lock. Its
location is approximately inside the rear
edge of the fuel filler flap.
5. Carefully pull the lock plunger straight back
- the flap can then be folded out.
After refuelling the flap can be relocked by first
closing it and then pushing the lock plunger
forward.
WARNING
There are sharp edges behind the panel so
move your hands slowly and carefully.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
139
Fuel cap
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in
the event of high outside temperatures. Open
the cap slowly
NOTE
Put the petrol cap back on after refuelling.
Turn until one or more clear clicks are heard.
Filling up with fuel
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
Fuel of a quality lower than that specified in this
chapter should not be used as engine power
and fuel consumption could otherwise be neg-
atively affected.
General information on fuel
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get-
ting fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel
are highly toxic and could cause permanent
injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical
attention immediately if fuel has been swal-
lowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills on to the ground can be
ignited by the exhaust fumes.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could cause
spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,
leading to fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of
fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's
guarantees, and any associated service
agreement. This applies to all engines.
NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines
that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).
For detailed information on fuel consumption,
CO
2
emissions and tank volume - see
page 287.
Petrol
Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Most
engines can be run with octane ratings of 91,
95 and 98 RON.
91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder
engines and should only be used in excep-
tional cases with other engines.
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum per-
formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
140
IMPORTANT
Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as
not to damage the catalytic converter.
Do not use additives not recommended
by Volvo.
Catalytic converter
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to
purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow of
exhaust gases close to the engine so that it
quickly reaches operating temperature. The
catalytic converter consists of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho-
dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,
i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem-
ical reaction without being used up them-
selves.
Lambda-sond
TM
oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that con-
tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
to air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. These adjustments create optimal
conditions for efficient combustion of harmful
emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide
and nitrous oxides) using the three-way cata-
lytic converter.
Diesel
Diesel must meet the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels which must not be used:
special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel
oil, RME
1
(Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable
oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements
in accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants,
such as excessively high volumes of sulphur
particles for example. Only use diesel fuel from
well-known producers. Never use diesel of
dubious quality.
At low temperatures (-40 °C to -6 °C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel
fuel designed for low temperatures around
freezing point is available from the major oil
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-
peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-
cipitate.
IMPORTANT
Use special winter grade fuel during cold
months.
1
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
141
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-
gent and water.
IMPORTANT
The sulphur content must be a maximum of
50 ppm.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine
means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
tank may need to be vented in the workshop in
order to restart the engine after fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star-
vation, the fuel system needs a few moments
to carry out a check. Do this before starting the
engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with
diesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and turn to key position II (see
page 143).
2. Wait approx. 1 minute.
3. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
or clutch pedal, and turn the remote control
key to start position III.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-
tion.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle fil-
ter, which results in more efficient emission
control. The particles in the exhaust gases are
collected in the filter during normal driving. So-
called "regeneration" is started in order to burn
away the particles and empty the filter. This
requires the engine to have reached normal
operating temperature.
Regeneration of the filter is automatic and nor-
mally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little
longer at a low average speed. Fuel consump-
tion may increase slightly during regeneration.
The rear window heating may be activated
automatically to increase the load on the
engine during regeneration without warning.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become
approximately 80% full of particles, the yellow
information symbol on the instrument panel
illuminates, and the message
SOOT FILTER
FULL SEE MANUAL
is shown on the instru-
ment panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature, preferably on a main road or motor-
way. The car should then be driven for approx-
imately ca 20 minutes more.
NOTE
A smaller reduction of engine power may be
noticed temporarily during regeneration.
When regeneration is complete the message is
cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that
the engine reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
142
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up it may be incapable of
functioning. Then it can be difficult to start
the engine and there is a risk that the filter
will have to be replaced.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
06
143
Before starting the engine
Apply the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox
Gear selector in position P or N.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch while driving or when the
car is being towed. The steering lock could
otherwise be activated, making it impossi-
ble to steer the car.
The remote control key must be in key posi-
tion II when the car is being towed.
NOTE
The remote control key's key blade must be
fully extended when starting the car, see
page 122. Otherwise there is a risk that the
immobiliser function will prevent the car
from starting.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is in order that the emis-
sions system can reach normal operating
temperature as quickly as possible, which
minimises exhaust emissions and protects
the environment.
Starting the engine
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -
wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover.
Petrol
Turn the remote control key to key position
III. If the engine does not start within
5–10 seconds, release the key and try
again.
Diesel
1. Turn the remote control key to key position
II.
An indicator symbol in the combined
instrument panel shows that engine pre-
heating is underway, see page 57.
2.
Turn the ignition key to position III when
the indicator symbol goes out.
> The starter motor is activated.
Ignition switch and steering lock
0 – Locked position
The steering lock is activated
when the remote control key
is removed from the ignition
switch.
I – Radio position
Steering lock deactivated.
Certain functions can be
used. The engine's electrical
system is not activated.
II – Driving position
The remote control key's
position when driving. The
whole electrical system is
engaged.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
06
144
III – Start position
The starter motor is activated.
The remote control key is
released when the engine has
started and then springs back
automatically to drive posi-
tion.
If the key is hard to turn, the front wheels may
be turned in such a way that there is tension in
the steering wheel lock. In which case, turn the
wheel back and forth to make it easier to turn
the key.
Autostart (3.2)
Using the autostart function, the remote con-
trol key does not need to be kept in key position
III until the engine has started.
Turn the key to the start position and then
release it - the starter motor then operates
automatically (up to 10 seconds) until the
engine has started.
NOTE
Make sure the steering wheel locks when
you leave the car. This reduces the risk of
theft.
Remote control keys and electronic
immobiliser
The remote control key must not hang with
other keys or metal objects on the same key
ring. The electronic immobiliser could be acti-
vated accidentally.
Never rev up the engine hard immediately after
a cold start!
If the engine does not start or misfires, contact
a workshop - a Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
WARNING
You must never turn the remote control key
to key position I or 0 and never remove the
remote control key from the ignition switch
while the car is moving. The steering lock
could otherwise be activated, making it
impossible to steer the car.
Always remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch when leaving the car –
especially if children are left alone in the car.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
145
Gear positions
G027997
P – Parking position
Select position P when you wish to start the
engine or park the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position
P is selected.
NOTE
The brake pedal must be depressed to
move the gear lever from the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when
the P position is engaged. Always apply the
parking brake when parking the car.
R – Reverse
The car must be stationary when position R is
selected.
N – Neutral
N is the neutral position. No gear is engaged
and the engine can be started. Apply the park-
ing brake when the car is stationary with the
gear selector in position N.
D – Drive
D is the normal driving position. The car auto-
matically shifts between the different gears of
the gearbox based on the level of acceleration
and speed. The car must be stationary when
the gear selector is moved to position D from
position R.
Gear selector inhibitor
G020237
The gear selector can always be moved freely
between N and D. Other positions are locked
with a latch that is released with the inhibitor
button on the gear selector.
With one press on the inhibitor button you can
move the lever forwards or backwards
between the gear positions, N, R and P.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
146
Manual positions
G026990
To move from the automatic driving position
D to a manual position, move the gear selector
to position M. To go from position M to the
automatic driving position D, move the selector
to position D.
On the 5-speed automatic gearbox, gears 3,
4 and 5
1
have the Lock-up function (locked
gears), which provides better engine braking
and lower fuel consumption.
While driving
The manual gearshift mode can be selected at
any time while driving. The engaged gear is
locked until you choose another gear.
If the gear selector is moved to (minus) the
car changes down a gear and engine brakes at
the same time as the accelerator pedal is
released. If the gear selector is moved to +
(plus) the car changes up a gear.
Third gear 3 is the highest gear that can be
used when starting.
W – Winter
Press the W button to activate and
deactivate the winter program.
Display of the
W symbol in the
combined instrument panel indi-
cates that the winter program is
active.
The winter programme starts the gearbox in
3rd gear to make it easier to pull off on slippery
roads. When the programme is engaged, lower
gears are activated only by kick-down.
The
W program can be selected regardless of
the position of the gear selector, but is only
operational when the selector is in position D.
Cold start
When starting in low temperatures, the gear
changes can sometimes feel hard. This is due
to the gearbox oil's viscosity at low tempera-
tures. To reduce engine emissions, the gear-
box shifts up later than normal when the engine
is started at low temperatures.
NOTE
Depending on the engine temperature when
the engine is started, the idle speed after a
cold start may be higher than normal for
certain engine types.
Adaptive system
The gearbox is controlled by what is known as
an adaptive system. The system continually
monitors how the gearbox is behaving and
senses every gear change for optimum change
quality.
Lock-up function
The gears have a lock-up function (locked
gears), which gives better engine braking and
lower fuel consumption.
1
2nd and 6th gear also have lock-up on the 6-speed automatic gearbox.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
147
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor, beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration, a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-
down position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-
tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
To prevent overrevving, the gearbox control
program has a protective downshift inhibitor
which prevents the kick-down function.
The kick-down function cannot be used in
manual gear position.
Safety systems
Cars with an automatic gearbox have special
safety systems:
Keylock
To remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch, the gear selector must be in the
P position. The key is locked in all other posi-
tions.
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another posi-
tion.
06 Starting and driving
All-wheel drive*
06
148
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
All-wheel drive – AWD
All-wheel drive is always engaged.
All-wheel drive means that all four road wheels
are driven at the same time. The power is auto-
matically distributed between the front and rear
wheels. An electronically controlled clutch sys-
tem distributes the power to the pair of wheels
that grips best. This provides the best traction
and prevents wheel spin.
Under normal driving conditions, the majority
of power is transmitted to the front wheels.
All-wheel drive improves driving safety in rain,
snow and icy conditions.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
149
Brake servo
If the car is rolling or is being towed with the
engine turned off, the brake pedal must be
pressed about five times harder than when the
engine is running. If the brake pedal is
depressed when the engine is started, you will
feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to
the brake servo becoming active. This may be
more noticeable if the car has Emergency
Brake Assistance (EBA).
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
NOTE
If braking with the engine switched off,
press the brake pedal sharply once, not
repeatedly.
Brake circuits
This symbol illuminates if a brake
circuit is not working.
If a fault should occur in one of the circuits, it
is still possible to brake the car. The brake
pedal will travel further and may feel softer than
normal. Harder pressure on the pedal is nee-
ded to produce the normal braking effect.
Dampness can affect braking
characteristics
Brake components become wet when the car
is driven in heavy rain, through pools of water
or when the car is washed. This may alter brake
pad friction characteristics so that there is a
delay before braking effect is noticed.
Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time
if driving for long stretches in rain or slushy
snow, as well as after setting off in very damp
or cold weather. This warms up the brake pads
and dries off any water. This precaution is also
recommended before parking the car for a long
period in such weather conditions.
Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-
ble, follow the Volvo service intervals as speci-
fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet, see
page 204.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's compo-
nents must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about
the procedure or engage a workshop to
carry out the inspection - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brakes are used heavily
When driving in the Alps or other roads with
similar characteristics, the car's brakes are
heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not
being depressed especially hard.
Because speed is often low, the brakes are not
cooled as effectively as when driving on flat
roads at higher speed.
So as not to overload the brakes, shift down
when driving downhill instead of using the foot
brake. Use the same gear driving downhill as
you would use driving uphill. This uses engine
braking more efficiently so the foot brake is
only required for brief periods.
Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an
additional load on the car's brakes.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
150
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
The anti-lock braking system
(ABS) prevents the wheels from
locking up during braking.
This means the ability to steer is
maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a
hazard for example.
After the engine has been started, the ABS will
perform a brief self-test at a speed of
about 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard as
pulses in the brake pedal.
To get the most out of the ABS:
1. Depress the brake pedal with full force.
Pulses will be felt.
2. Steer the car in the direction of travel. Do
not release the pressure on the pedal.
Practice braking with the ABS system in a traf-
fic-free area and in different weather condi-
tions.
The ABS symbol illuminates for two seconds if
there was a fault in the ABS system when the
engine was last running.
Electronic brake force distribution
system – EBD
The Electronic Brakeforce Distribution system
(EBD) is an integrated part of the ABS system.
The EBD system controls the brake force to the
rear wheels so that the best possible braking
force is always available. Pulses will be heard
and felt through the brake pedal when the sys-
tem regulates brake force.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illu-
minate at the same time, there may be a
fault in the brake system. If the level in the
brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage,
drive carefully to the nearest workshop and
have the brake system checked - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
Emergency Brake Assistance – EBA
(Emergency Brake Assistance) For sudden
braking, full-strength braking is provided
instantaneously. The EBA function senses
when heavy braking is underway by registering
how quickly the brake pedal is depressed.
Continue braking without easing off on the
brake pedal. The function is suspended when
the pressure on the brake pedal eases. This
function is always active. It cannot be disen-
gaged.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low-
ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the
brake pedal is released then all braking
ceases.
06 Starting and driving
Stability and traction control system*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
151
General
The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control
system DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Traction
Control) improves the car's traction and helps
the driver to avoid skidding.
A pulsing sound may be noticed during braking
or acceleration when the system is in action.
The car may accelerate slower than expected
when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
Active Yaw Control
The function limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise
the car.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during accel-
eration.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and trans-
fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-
ning to the one that is not.
Reduced operation
G028511
Thumbwheel
RESET button
System operation during skidding and accel-
eration can be partially deactivated.
Operation during skidding is then delayed and
so allows more skidding which provides
greater freedom for dynamic driving. Traction
in deep snow or sand is improved at the same
time as acceleration is no longer limited.
Operation
1. Turn the thumbwheel (1) until the DSTC
menu appears.
DSTC ON means that the system function
is unchanged.
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that
system operation is reduced.
2.
Press and hold RESET (2) until the menu is
changed.
The system remains reduced until the
driver reactivates it or until the engine is
switched off - after the engine is started the
next time DSTC is back in its normal mode
again.
WARNING
Suppressing system function may alter the
driving characteristics of the car.
NOTE
DSTC ON is shown for several seconds on
the display each time the engine is started.
Messages on the display
ANTI-SKID TEMPORARILY OFF means that
the system has been temporarily reduced due
to excessive brake temperature.
The function is reactivated automatically
when the brakes have cooled.
ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED system
disabled due to a fault.
06 Starting and driving
Stability and traction control system*
06
152
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
> If the message remains when the engine
is restarted, drive to a workshop. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
DSTC system
The symbol illuminates and goes out
again after approx. 2 seconds when the
engine is started
Indicates system check.
The symbol flashes
Indicates that the system is operating.
The symbol illuminates and stays lit
At the same time the display shows ANTI-
SKID SERVICE REQUIRED
.
Indicates a fault in the DSTC system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
If the warning symbol goes out, the fault
was temporary and it is not necessary to
visit a workshop.
If the warning symbol remains illuminated
then a workshop should check the system
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
The symbol illuminates with a constant
yellow glow
Symbol for Warning
At the same time the display shows
TRACTION CONTROL
TEMPORARILY OFF
.
Indicates that the system has been tem-
porarily reduced due to excessive brake
temperature.
Automatic reactivation of the function takes
place when the brake temperature has
returned to normal.
WARNING
Under normal driving conditions, the
DSTC system improves the car's road
safety, but this should not be taken as a
reason to increase speed.
Always follow the usual precautions for safe
cornering and driving on slippery road sur-
faces.
06 Starting and driving
Park assist syst*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
153
General
1
Parking assistance front and rear.
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
A signal indicates the distance to a detected
object.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish the
driver's own responsibility during parking.
The sensors have blind spots where objects
cannot be detected. Be aware of children
and animals near the car.
Variants
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
Rear only
Both front and rear
Function
The system is switched on automatically when
the car is started at which point the lamp in the
switch for parking assistance illuminates.
The display shows the text message
PARK
ASSIST ACTIVE
if reverse gear is engaged or
if the front sensors detect an object.
Parking assistance is active at speeds below
15 km/h. The system is deactivated at higher
speeds. When the speed is below 10 km/h the
system is reactivated.
The frequency of the signal increases as you
come closer to an object in front of or behind
the car. If the volume of another audio source
from the audio system is high, then this is auto-
matically lowered.
The tone becomes constant at a distance of
about 30 cm. If there are objects within this
distance behind or in front of the car, the signal
alternates between left and right-hand speak-
ers.
Rear parking assistance
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 m. Rear parking assistance is acti-
vated when reverse gear is engaged. The sig-
nal comes from the rear loudspeakers.
The system must be deactivated when revers-
ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar
or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrier
would trigger the sensors.
Rear parking assistance is deactivated auto-
matically when towing a trailer if a Volvo gen-
uine trailer cable is used.
Front parking assistance
The distance covered to the front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The signal comes from the
front loudspeakers.
Front parking assistance cannot be combined
with extra lights because the sensors are affec-
ted by the extra lights.
Fault indicator
If the information symbol illumi-
nates with constant glow and the
display shows
PARK ASSIST
SERVICE REQUIRED
then park-
ing assistance is disengaged.
1
Depending on the market, the Parking assistance system may be either Standard, Option or Accessory.
06 Starting and driving
Park assist syst*
06
154
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning sig-
nals that are caused by external sound
sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre-
quencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Off/On
G027104
Button position in the row may vary.
Parking assistance can be deactivated with the
button in the switch panel. The lamp in the
switch goes out. Parking assistance is
switched on again with the switch and the lamp
illuminates.
Cleaning the sensors
G026946
Parking assistance sensors.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals.
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System - BLIS*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
155
General
G020295
Rearview mirror with BLIS system.
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not a
replacement for, a safe driving style and use
of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace
the driver's attention and responsibility. The
responsibility for changing lanes safely
always rests with the driver.
BLIS is an information system that under cer-
tain conditions can help to draw the driver's
attention to vehicles moving in the same direc-
tion in the so-called "blind spot".
The system is designed to work most effec-
tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane
highways.
BLIS is based on digital camera technology.
The cameras (1) are located under the door
mirrors.
When a camera has detected a vehicle inside
the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illu-
minates with a constant glow.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle.
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault
arises in the system. If for example the sys-
tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS
indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown
in the information display. In such cases, check
and clean the lenses. If necessary, the system
can be switched off temporarily by pressing the
BLIS button, see page 156.
Blind spots
"Blind spots" intended to be covered by BLIS
cameras.
Distance A = approx. 3.0 m
Distance B = approx. 9.5 m
Cleaning
In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-
era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be
cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not
scratched.
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System - BLIS*
06
156
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice
or snow. If necessary, brush snow away
from the lenses.
When BLIS operates
The system operates when the car is driven at
a speed above 10 km/h.
Overtaking
The system is designed to react if you overtake
another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h
faster than the other vehicle.
The system is designed to react if you are over-
taken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h
faster than your vehicle.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is revers-
ing.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal
other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre-
vent the vehicle in the screened area from
being detected by BLIS.
Daylight and darkness
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of
the surrounding vehicles. The system is
designed to detect motor vehicles such as
cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
In darkness the system reacts to the head-
lamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles with
headlamps that are switched off are not
detected by the system. This means for exam-
ple that the system does not react to a trailer
without headlamps which is towed behind a
car or truck.
WARNING
The system does not react to cyclists or
moped riders.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to
those of the human eye, i.e. they do not see
as well in e.g. heavy snowfall, strong
oncoming light or thick fog.
Activate/deactivate
G026955
Button for activating/deactivating.
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash
three times when BLIS is activated.
The system can be deactivated/activated by
pressing BLIS.
When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button
goes out and a text message is shown on the
instrument panel display.
When BLIS is activated the light in the button
illuminates, a new text message is shown on
the display and the indicator lamps in the door
panels flash three times. Press the READ but-
ton to clear the text message. For more infor-
mation on messages, see page 58.
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System - BLIS*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
157
BLIS system message
Text on the dis-
play
A
Specification
BLIND-SPOT INFO
SYSTEM ON
The BLIS system is
activated.
BLIND-SPOT
SYST SERVICE
REQUIRED
Blind spot syst. dis-
engaged - contact a
workshop.
BLIND-SPOT
SYST FUNCTION
REDUCED
Reduced function in
the data transmis-
sion between the
BLIS system's cam-
era and the car's
electrical system.
The camera resets
itself when the data
transmission
between the BLIS
system's camera
and the car's electri-
cal system returns to
normal.
BLIND-SPOT
SYST R CAMERA
BLOCKED
Right camera
blocked - clean the
lens.
Text on the dis-
play
A
Specification
BLIND-SPOT
SYST L CAMERA
BLOCKED
Left camera blocked
- clean the lens.
BLIND-SPOT
SYST CAMERAS
BLOCKED
One or both cam-
eras blocked - clean
the lenses.
BLIND-SPOT INFO
SYSTEM OFF
The BLIS system is
deactivated.
A
Messages above are only shown if the remote control key is
in key position II (or if the engine is running) and BLIS is
active (i.e. if the driver has not switched off the system).
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components
must only be performed by a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Limitations
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may
illuminate despite there being no other vehicle
within the blind spot.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso-
lated occasions despite there being no
other vehicle within the blind spot then this
does not mean that a fault has arisen in the
system.
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the
display shows the text
BLIND-SPOT SYST
SERVICE REQUIRED
.
Here are several examples of situations where
the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if
there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System - BLIS*
06
158
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G018177
Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g.
noise barrier or concrete road surface.
Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
159
Start assistance
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged
and the engine does not start. Do not tow the
car to bump start it, see page 161.
IMPORTANT
Bump starting the car can damage the cat-
alytic converter.
Towing
Find out the highest legal speed for towing
before towing the car.
The car must always be towed facing forward.
1. Unlock the steering wheel lock so that the
car can be steered
2. For the driver of the towing vehicle: Drive
gently.
For the driver of the vehicle being towed:
Keep the towline taut by holding your foot
gently pressed on the brake pedal in order
to avoid unnecessary jerking.
WARNING
The steering lock remains in the position it
was in when the power was cut off. The
steering lock must be unlocked before tow-
ing.
The remote control key must be in key posi-
tion II. Never remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch while driving or
when the car is being towed.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off. The
brake pedal must be pressed about five
times harder than normal, and the steering
will be considerably heavier than normal.
Automatic gearbox
Move the gear selector to N position and
release the parking brake.
Cars with automatic gearbox must not be
towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further than
80 km.
Towing eye
Before towing the towing eye must be bolted
securely onto the bumper. The socket and
cover for the towing eye are on the right-hand
side of each bumper.
The towing eye is in the tool kit in the cargo
area.
G028528
Proceed as follows:
1. Release the bottom edge of the cover (A)
with a screwdriver or a coin.
2. Screw in the towing eye (B).
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
160
3. Screw the eye securely into place right up
to the flange (C). You can use a wheel
wrench.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and refit
the cover.
IMPORTANT
On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing
eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting.
In which case, secure the tow rope in the
towbar. For this reason, it is advisable to
always store the detachable towbar in the
car.
Recovery
The car must always be towed with the wheels
rolling forward.
IMPORTANT
An all-wheel drive car (AWD) with raised
front suspension must not be towed at
speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be
towed further than 50 km.
WARNING
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for recovering the car. Call a
recovery service for recovery assistance.
06 Starting and driving
Jump starting
06
161
Starting with a donor battery
G030860
The battery is fitted in the rear of the car (see
page 216) but there are also connection points
under the bonnet.
If the battery is flat then the car can be started
with current from another battery.
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid short circuits or
other damage:
1. Turn the remote control key to key position
0.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage
of 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine and
make sure that the two cars do not touch
each other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2).
> A spring-loaded cover over the car's
extra positive terminal must first be
folded up!
6. Connect one of the black jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's negative ter-
minal (3).
7. Fit the second clamp on a grounding point
e.g. one of the engine's lifting eyes (4).
8. Check that the jump lead clamps are
affixed securely so that there are no sparks
during the starting procedure.
9. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
10. Start the engine in the car with the dis-
charged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the
start procedure. There is a risk of sparks
forming.
11. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -
first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the
clamp connected to the red jump lead!
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is con-
nected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
06 Starting and driving
Jump starting
06
162
For more information on the car's battery, see
page 215.
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
06
163
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information on weights, see
page 280.
If the towing bracket is fitted by an authorised
Volvo workshop, then the car is delivered with
the necessary equipment for driving with a
trailer.
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped
for driving with a trailer.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket complies
with the specified maximum towball load.
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
mended pressure for a full load. For tyre
pressure decal location, see page 181.
The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km.
The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
speed.
For safety reasons, the maximum permit-
ted speed for the car when coupled with a
trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the
regulations in force for the permitted
speeds and weights.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see page 280.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer
may be difficult to control in the event of
sudden movement and braking.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further limit
trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be
certified for higher towing weights than the
car can actually tow.
Automatic gearbox
NOTE
Some models require an oil cooler for the
automatic gearbox when driving with a
trailer. Check with your nearest Volvo dealer
as to what applies to your car if you have a
retrofitted towbar.
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum
gear related to load and engine speed.
In the event of overheating a warning sym-
bol illuminates on the instrument panel
combined with a text message - follow the
recommendation given.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic transmission in
a higher gear than the engine "can cope
with" - it is not always a good idea to drive
at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
06
164
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3.
Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
Block the wheels with chocks when park-
ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving posi-
tion D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
Level control
If your car is equipped with automatic levelling,
the rear suspension always retains the correct
ride height regardless of load. When the car is
stationary, the rear suspension sinks. This is
completely normal. When starting with a load,
the level is pumped up after a certain distance.
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
165
Towbar
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,
the installation instructions for the loose sec-
tion must be followed carefully, see page 167.
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
Follow the installation instructions care-
fully.
The detachable section must be locked
with the key before setting off.
Check that the indicator window shows
green.
Important checks
The towbar's towball must be cleaned and
greased regularly.
NOTE
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is
used, it is not necessary to grease the tow-
ball.
Storing the towbar
G031114
Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and
store it in the appointed location in the car,
firmly fastened with its strap.
Trailer cable
G014589
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has
7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved
by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
on the ground.
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
06
166
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Specifications
G026682
G027108
G027109
Dimensions for mounting points (mm)
A B C D E F G
Fixed or detachable towbar 1110 85 1081 541 122 50 354
1 Side member
2 Ball centre
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
167
Fitting the towbar
G017317
1. Remove the protective cover by first press-
ing in the catch
and then pulling the
cover straight back
.
G020301
2. Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clock-
wise.
G020302
3. Check that the indicator window (3) shows
red. If the window does not show red,
press in (1) and turn the locking wheel anti-
clockwise (2) until you hear a click.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
168
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G020304
4. Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
G020306
5. Check that the indicator window shows
green.
G020307
6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-
tion. Remove the key from the lock.
G020309
7. Check that the towbar is secure by pulling
it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be clean
and dry.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
169
G020310
8. Safety cable.
WARNING
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to
the correct place.
Removing the towbar
G020301
1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
G020312
2. Push in the locking wheel (1) and turn it
anticlockwise (2) until you hear a click.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
170
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G020314
3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towbar rearward and
upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the
car, see page 165.
G017318
4. Push on the protective cover.
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
``
171
Correct light pattern for left or right-
hand traffic
G020317
Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.
Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic.
So as not to dazzle oncoming drivers, the
headlamp beam pattern can be altered by
masking the headlamps. The quality of the
beam pattern may not be as good.
Headlamp masking
Copy the templates, see page 174. Transfer
the pattern to a self-adhesive, waterproof
material such as opaque tape for example.
The mask is positioned using the dot (5) in the
headlamp lens as a reference point, which
should align with the red dot on the respective
template. The long red line on the illustrations
corresponds to the line in the headlamp lens to
which the template should be matched.
After copying the templates, check the meas-
urements so that the reference measurements
cover enough of the beam pattern.
The templates are for both LHD and RHD vari-
ants and are positioned as illustrated.
The upper illustration is for LHD cars. The lower
illustration is for RHD cars.
Halogen headlamps
Copy templates 1 and 2. Check the measure-
ments to ensure they are correct. Transfer the
template to a self-adhesive, waterproof mate-
rial and cut it out.
Position each template so that the arrows point
towards the centre and the dot on the template
matches the dot on the headlamp lens.
Reference measurements template
1 and 2
The long sides of the templates should be
approx. 82 mm.
Xenon headlamps
Copy templates 3 and 4. Check the measure-
ments to ensure they are correct. Transfer the
template to a self-adhesive, waterproof mate-
rial and cut it out.
Position each template so that the arrows point
towards the centre and the dot on the template
matches the dot on the headlamp lens. The
template marking > < should be aligned with
the line on the headlamp lens.
Reference measurements template 3
The line between the > < markings on the tem-
plates should be approx. 140 mm.
Reference measurements template 4
The line between the > < markings on the tem-
plates should be approx. 112 mm.
Adjusting headlamp pattern for Active Xenon
headlamps (ABL), see page 60.
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
172
G030200
Left-hand drive car in left-hand traffic.
Masking on right-hand halogen lens
Masking on left-hand halogen lens
Masking on right-hand Xenon lens
Masking on left-hand Xenon lens
Control point in headlamp lens.
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
``
173
G030201
Right-hand drive car in right-hand traffic.
Masking on left-hand halogen lens
Masking on right-hand halogen lens
Masking on left-hand Xenon lens
Masking on right-hand Xenon lens
Control point in headlamp lens.
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
174
Templates for masking.
06 Starting and driving
06
175
176
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 178
Tyre pressure........................................................................................ 181
Warning triangle* and spare wheel*...................................................... 182
Changing wheels................................................................................... 185
Emergency puncture repair*................................................................. 188
WHEELS AND TYRES
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
178
Driving characteristics and tyres
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving cha-
racteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
pressure and speed rating are important for
how the car performs.
When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the
same type and dimensions, and preferably also
the same make, are fitted to all four wheels.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified on the tyre pressure label, see
page 289.
Designation of dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example of designation:
235/60R18 103 V.
235 Tyre width (mm)
60 Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
R Radial ply
18 Rim diameter in inches (")
103 Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)
V Speed rating for maximum permit-
ted speed (in this case 240 km/h).
Speed ratings
The car is approved as a whole, which means
that dimensions and speed ratings must not
differ from those specified on the vehicle reg-
istration document. The only exception to
these conditions is winter tyres (both those
with metal studs and those without). If such a
tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster
than the speed rating of the tyre (for example,
class Q can be driven at a maximum of
160 km/h).
Remember that traffic regulations determine
how fast a car can be driven, not the speed
class of the tyres.
Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.
Q 160 km/h (used only
on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.
For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as
possible when you replace them. This is espe-
cially important with regard to winter tyres. The
last four digits in the sequence mean the week
and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's
DOT marking (Department of Transportation),
and this is stated with four digits, for example
1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac-
tured in week 15 of 2010.
Tyre age
All tyres older than six years should be checked
by an expert even if they seem undamaged.
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
179
The reason for this is that tyres age and decom-
pose, even if they are hardly ever or never used.
The function can therefore be affected due to
the tyre's constituent materials being broken
down. In such a case the tyre should then not
be used.This also applies to spare tyres, winter
tyres and tyres saved for future use. Examples
of external signs which indicate that the tyre is
unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.
The age of the tyre can be determined by the
DOT marking, see illustration above.
More even wear and maintenance
The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 289. Driving style, tyre pres-
sure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-
ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable dis-
tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, the least
worn tyres must always be placed on the rear.
Understeer is normally easier to correct than
oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for-
wards in a straight line rather than having the
rear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos-
sible complete loss of control over the car. This
is why it is important for the rear wheels never
to lose grip before the front wheels.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging
up, and not standing up.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
G020323
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear
Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down
to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height
with the tread wear indicators. Change to new
tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor
grip in rain and snow.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with specific
winter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions are
dependent on engine variant. When driving on
winter tyres, they must be fitted to all four
wheels.
NOTE
Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre types
are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500 – 1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyre. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore
recommended not to drive on winter tyres that
have a tread depth of less than four millimetres.
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
180
Snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive
cars.
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
Check that the snow chain does not make con-
tact anywhere and that it is correctly fitted and
well tensioned.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-
lent chains designed for the car model, and
tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of
uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The
wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to your car and lead to an accident.
Summer and winter wheels
G020325
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation
When summer and winter wheels are changed,
see page 185, the wheels should be marked
with which side of the car they were mounted
on, for example L for left and R for right. Tyres
with a tread pattern which are designed to only
turn in one direction have the direction of rota-
tion marked with an arrow. The tyre must
always rotate in the same direction throughout
its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched
between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice
versa. If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the
car's braking characteristics and capacity to
force rain, snow and slush out of the way are
adversely affected. Tyres with the greatest
tread depth should always be fitted to the rear
of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).
Volvo recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop for checking if you are
uncertain about tread depth.
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
07
181
Recommended tyre pressure
G020791
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar shows which pressures the tyres should
have at different loads and speed conditions.
Stated on the decal:
Tyre pressures for the car's recommended
tyre size
ECO pressure
1
Spare wheel tyre pressure (Temporary
Spare).
Checking the tyre pressure
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also
varies depending on ambient temperature.
Even after several kilometres of driving, the
tyres warm up and the pressure increases. So
air must not be released if the pressure is
checked when the tyres are warm. While the
pressure must be increased if it is too low.
Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con-
sumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair the
car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre
pressure that is too low can also result in the
tyres overheating and disintegrating.
For information on the correct tyre pressure,
see page 289. The specified tyre pressures
refer to "cold tyres". ("Cold tyres" means the
tyres are the same temperature as the ambient
temperature.)
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre
pressure for full load is recommended in order
to obtain optimum fuel economy.
Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road
noise and steering characteristics.
1
ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel*
07
182
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Warning triangle
G027065
Follow the regulations in force for the use of a
warning triangle* in the country in which you
are driving.
Use the warning triangle as follows:
1. Detach the warning triangle case. It is held
in place with a Velcro strap.
2. Remove the warning triangle from its case
(A).
3. Fold out the four support legs on the warn-
ing triangle.
4. Fold out both red sides of the warning tri-
angle. Position the warning triangle in a
suitable place with regard to traffic.
After use:
Pack everything in reverse order.
Make sure that the warning triangle with case
is securely fastened in the compartment.
Spare wheel Temporary Spare*
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for use temporarily and must be
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos-
sible. The car's handling may be altered by the
use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is
smaller than the normal wheel. The car's
ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay
attention to high kerbs and do not machine
wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the
front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the
same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on
the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare
wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre
pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the
tyre pressure table, see page 289.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare
wheel on the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
183
Spare wheel – removing
The spare wheel is located under the car. The
jack*, tool kit* and crank are located under the
floor hatch. The crank is in two parts. One part
is in the tool kit, and the other is under the tool
kit.
NOTE
There is a puller spanner in the tool kit to
remove the hub cap (certain wheel options).
The location of the jack varies:
Cars seating seven
Cars seating five
Proceed as follows to release the spare wheel:
1. Lower the bottom of the tailgate and lift up
the floor hatch in the cargo area.
2. Take the two parts of the crank and assem-
ble.
3. Fit the crank in the winch.
4. Loosen the tyre by cranking anticlockwise
until you reach the stop.
NOTE
The cable could damage the car if it hangs
free while driving.
5. Release the wheel from the cable and wind
up the cable clockwise.
6. Place the punctured tyre in the cargo area.
The tool kit contains a plastic bag for the
tyre.
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel*
07
184
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
The spot under the car is only intended for
the car's original spare wheel. Do not place
any other wheels there.
Spare wheel – refitting
It is best to have two people put the spare
wheel back in place. One person to crank and
the other to guide the wheel.
1. Crank out the cable and place its anchor in
the centre hole of the wheel.
2. Slowly crank (clockwise) the cable in a bit.
3. Angle the wheel so that it comes in over the
exhaust system.
4. Hold down the rear edge of the wheel while
cranking it in.
5. Place the wheel above the rear axle,
against the floor.
6. Crank to the stop point.
7. Check that the wheel is properly secured.
WARNING
Check that the right mounting points are
being used. A production anchorage with
pin is located between the jacking points.
This is not strong enough to use to lift the
car. If you are unsure about the location of
the jacking points, Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
An incorrectly fitted jack could damage the
door and body.
Tools - returning into place
The tools and jack* must be returned to their
correct places after use. The jack must be
cranked to the correct position, see the pre-
ceding illustration, in order to have space.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
First aid*
A case with first aid equipment is located in the
cargo area.
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
185
Removing wheels
G026997
Remember to set out the warning triangle if you
must change a wheel in a trafficked area. There
are two jacking points on each side of the car.
The jacking points are centred under the bot-
tom of the doors.
1. Park the car on level and firm ground.
2.
Move the gear selector to the P position
and apply the parking brake.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use stones or wooden blocks for example.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it
is free from dirt.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question, which
is indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum
lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting
height.
4. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench and
crank, see location see page 183. If
another jack is selected, see page 205.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack. The car could fall, causing inju-
ries.
The car's original jack should only be used
when changing wheels. All other work on
the car should be done using workshop
jacks and axle stands under the part of the
car that is raised.
The jack screw should be kept well lubri-
cated.
If the surface is too soft, the jack could slide
to the side and the car could fall. No one
should be in the car when the wheel is being
changed.
NOTE
The car's regular jack is designed only for
use occasionally and for a short time, such
as when changing a wheel with a punctured
tyre, switching between summer tyres and
winter tyres, etc. Only the jack belonging to
the specific model is to be used to jack up
the car. If the car is to be jacked up more
often, or for a longer time than is required
just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack
is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
07
186
5. Use the wheel wrench to loosen the wheel
bolts ½-1 turn. Turn anticlockwise.
G020332
G027000
WARNING
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack-
ing point and the jack.
WARNING
If the jack is positioned incorrectly, the car
could fall. Risk of injury.
6. Place the jack under the jacking point and
crank it up towards the car floor. There is
an recess in the plastic cover at each
anchorage point. Check that the jack sits
securely in the anchorage. Then adjust the
jack so that its foot is positioned vertically
under the anchorage. See illustration.
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
7. Lift the car until the wheel is free.
8. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
Fitting the wheel
1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Screw in the wheel bolts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts alternately and in
torque steps. Tightening torque: 140 Nm
(14.0 kpm). It is important that they are
tightened to the correct torque. Check with
a torque wrench.
5. Screw the jack all the way down before
returning it to the cargo area. Then secure
it in place.
6. Check that the new tyre has the correct
amount of pressure.
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
07
187
NOTE
This wheel bolt may also be used for steel
wheel rims.
Make sure to use the correct type of bolt. Volvo
recommends that you contact the nearest
Volvo workshop if you are in any doubt.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
188
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
The emergency puncture repair kit is used to
seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust
the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as
a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle
must be replaced before its expiration date and
after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-
tured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
NOTE
The jack is an option on cars equipped with
emergency puncture repair kit.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in
the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency
puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,
cracks or similar damage.
12 V-sockets for the compressor are located
by the centre console in the front, by the rear
seat and in the cargo area, see pages 60, 73
and 117. Choose the electrical socket that is
nearest the punctured tyre.
IMPORTANT
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sock-
ets - see pages 60 and 73 - no other current
consumer must be connected to the other
one.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Taking out the emergency puncture
repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit, with com-
pressor and tools, is located under the floor in
the cargo area.
1. Fold away the rear edge of the floor mat,
forward from the back.
2. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.
Overview
G020400
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
189
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
Sealing punctured tyres
G019723
For information on the function of the parts, see
preceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture
repair kit.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
3.
Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
NOTE
If the compressor is connected to one of the
two 12 V sockets, no other current con-
sumer must be connected to the other one.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
8.
Flick the switch to position I.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-
pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be
switched off immediately. The journey
should not be continued. Contacting an
authorised tyre centre is recommended.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
190
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
pressure is 1.8 bar and
maximum is 3.5 bar.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole
in the tyre is too big. The journey should not
be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre
centre is recommended.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit
the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive
approximately 3 km at a maximum speed
of 80 km/h so that the sealing fluid can seal
the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf-
ficiently sealed. The journey should not be
continued. Contact a tyre centre.
4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar
then the tyre must be inflated to the pres-
sure specified on the tyre pressure label.
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
that this replacement is performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
6. Return the emergency puncture repair kit
to the cargo area.
7. Volvo recommends that you drive to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
191
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf-
ficient ventilation.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's
12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch
to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure decal. (Release air using
the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-
sure is too high.)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Changing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-
mentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural
rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
NOTE
Leave the container at a collection point for
storing dangerous waste.
192
Cleaning................................................................................................ 194
Touching up paintwork......................................................................... 198
Rustproofing......................................................................................... 200
CAR CARE
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
194
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.
Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.
Use car shampoo.
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings con-
tain chemicals that affect and discolour
paintwork very quickly. An authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discoloration.
Hose down the underbody.
Rinse the whole car until the loose dirt has
been removed in order to reduce the risk
of scratches from washing. Do not spray
directly onto the locks.
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that the surfaces
must not then be warmed up by the sun!
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
soap solution or car shampoo.
Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty
surfaces.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing water
droplets to dry in strong sunlight then the
risk of water stains that may need to be
polished away is reduced.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional-
ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
example.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents
but use water and a non-scratching sponge
instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have
condensation on the inside of the lens. This
is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting
is designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp when it
has been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg-
ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Removing bird droppings
Wash away bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. This discoloration can only be
removed by a specialist.
Chromed wheels
IMPORTANT
Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on
chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a
sponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke-
warm water.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the
surface of the car (the distance applies to all
exterior parts).
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
195
IMPORTANT
Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt.
When using a pressure washer: Make sure
that the nozzle of the pressure washer is not
closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do not
spray directly onto the locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the
car, including the parking brake, to ensure
that moisture and corrosion do not attack
the brake linings and reduce braking per-
formance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
This heats and dries the brake pads. Do the
same thing after starting in very damp or cold
weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components (such as glossy trim mouldings).
When using such a cleaning agent the instruc-
tions must be followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rub-
ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec-
essary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed before this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit.
More stubborn stains can be removed using
fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-
uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the
packaging carefully. Many preparations con-
tain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment such
as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre
sealing or similar could damage the paint-
work. Paintwork damage caused by such
treatments is not covered by Volvo war-
ranty.
Water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfa-
ces as this could ruin their water-repellent
properties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage
the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
coating.
NOTE
Treatment with a special finishing agent
available from Volvo dealers is recom-
mended in order to maintain the water-
repellent properties. This should be used
first after three years and then each year.
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
196
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-
ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
agents.
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a
vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and
lift the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at
each pin.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recom-
mended by your Volvo dealer!
Treatment of stains on textile upholstery
and headliner
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free
and is treated to preserve its original appear-
ance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau-
tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and
processed so that it retains its natural charac-
teristics. It is given a protective coating, but
regular cleaning is required in order to maintain
both characteristics and appearance. Volvo
offers a comprehensive product for the clean-
ing and treatment of leather upholstery which,
when used in accordance with the instructions,
preserves the leather's protective coating.
After a period of use the natural appearance of
the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend-
ing more or less on the surface texture of the
leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather
and shows that it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and the application of protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail-
able from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
Certain items of coloured clothing (for
example, jeans and suede garments)
may stain the upholstery.
Never use strong solvents. Such prod-
ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and
leather upholstery.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
197
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
Vacuuming is important prior to using leather
care agents.
1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved pro-
tection against stains and improved UV pro-
tection.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects may damage the leather, (e.g.
rings).
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois-
tened sponge and neutral soap.
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plas-
tic.
Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
agents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and
blood)
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a
solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for group 1.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
2. Same procedure as for group 1.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains.
Never use strong stain removers.
Cleaning seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from your
Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry
before allowing it to retract.
08 Car care
Touching up paintwork
08
198
Paintwork
Paint is an important part of the car's rust-
proofing and should therefore be checked reg-
ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged
paintwork should be rectified immediately. The
most common types of paintwork damage are
stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
Colour code (Paint code)
Data plate.
Code for car's colour
It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product decal location, see page 278.
Stone chips and scratches
G020345
Before work is started, the car must be clean
and dry as well as at a temperature above
15 °C.
Materials
primer
1
- for e.g. plastic-clad bumpers
there are special adhesive primers availa-
ble in spray cans
base coat and clear coat - are available in
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks
2
masking tape
fine sand paper
1
.
Repairing minor paint damage such as
stone chips and scratches
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
If the damage has reached down to a metal
surface (sheet steel), it is preferable to use
a primer. In the event of damage to a plas-
tic surface, an adhesive primer should be
used for better results - spray into the
spray can's cap and brush thinly.
2. A light sanding with very fine abrasive
material can be performed locally before
painting if necessary (e.g. if there are rough
edges). Clean the surface thoroughly and
allow to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, matchstick or similar. Finish with
base coat and clear coat once the primer
has dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
1
If required.
2
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
08 Car care
Touching up paintwork
08
199
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with base coat and
clear coat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
08 Car care
Rustproofing
08
200
Inspection and maintenance
Your car has already received a thorough and
complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of
the body are made of galvanised sheet metal.
The underbody is protected by a wear-resis-
tant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, pene-
trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
members, cavities and closed sections.
Maintain the car's rustproofing.
Keep the car clean. Hose down the under-
body. If using a pressure washer, keep the
nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted sur-
faces.
Regularly check and touch-up the rust-
proofing treatment as necessary.
The car's rustproofing does not normally
require treatment for approximately 12 years.
After this period, it should be treated at three-
year intervals. If the car needs further treat-
ment, Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop for assistance.
08 Car care
08
201
202
Volvo service......................................................................................... 204
Self-maintenance.................................................................................. 205
Bonnet and engine compartment......................................................... 207
Oils and fluids....................................................................................... 209
Wiper blades......................................................................................... 213
Battery................................................................................................... 215
Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 218
Fuses..................................................................................................... 225
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
09 Maintenance and service
Volvo service
09
204
Volvo service programme
Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughly
test driven. It was checked again in accord-
ance with Volvo Car Corporation regulations
before it was handed over to you.
To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as pos-
sible, follow the Volvo service programme
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo also recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to perform the
service and maintenance work. Volvo work-
shops have the personnel, special tools and
service literature to guarantee the highest qual-
ity of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Special service measures
Certain service measures which affect the car's
electrical system can only be performed using
electronic equipment specially developed for
your car. Similarly, Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop before
starting or performing service work that affects
the electrical system.
09 Maintenance and service
Self-maintenance
09
205
Before starting work on the car
Battery
Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and tightened.
Never disconnect the battery when the engine
is running (e.g. if replacing the battery).
Never use a quick charger to charge the bat-
tery. The battery cables must be disconnected
when charging the battery.
The battery contains acid that is both corrosive
and toxic. It is therefore important to handle the
battery in an environmentally correct manner.
Let your Volvo dealer assist you.
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage
and output. The voltage in the ignition sys-
tem is highly dangerous. The ignition must
therefore always be switched off for work in
the engine compartment.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils
when the ignition is on or the engine is hot.
Check regularly
Check the following at regular intervals, for
example, when refuelling:
Coolant – The level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks on the expansion
tank.
Engine oil – The level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks.
Power steering fluid – The level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks.
Washer fluid – The reservoir should be well
filled. Fill washer fluid with antifreeze at
temperatures around freezing point.
Brake and clutch fluid – The level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks.
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind
the radiator) may start automatically some
after the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
Lifting the car
G027001
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack is selected other than the one recom-
mended by Volvo, follow the instructions for
use supplied with the equipment.
If the car is lifted with a workshop jack; position
the jack with the front edge on the subframe.
Do not damage the splashguard under the
engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so
that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always
use axle stands or the like.
09 Maintenance and service
Self-maintenance
09
206
If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop
lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are
fixed under the lifting points. See previous illus-
tration.
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment
09
207
Opening the bonnet
G026995
1. Pull the handle on the far left (or right if the
car is RHD) under the instrument panel.
You will hear when the lock releases.
2. Insert your hand to the right under the front
edge of the bonnet (below the grille).
3. Press up the safety catch handle.
4. Release the handle and open the bonnet.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
WARNING
Close the bonnet by placing your hand on
its top and pressing down. Do not close it
by holding the grille. Engine components on
the inside could injure your fingers.
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment
09
208
Engine compartment
G027074
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid
(located on the driver's side)
Relay and fuses
Air filter. (The cover has a different design
depending on engine variant.)
Radiator
Engine oil dipstick
Engine oil filling
Washer fluid reservoir
Reservoir for power steering fluid (location
depends on engine variant.)
Expansion tank, cooling system
Chassis data plate
Battery (in the cargo area)
Air conditioning system
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluores-
cent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when
looking for leaks.
Volvo recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pres-
surised refrigerant R134a. This system must
only be serviced and repaired by an author-
ised workshop.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
209
Checking the engine oil
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
When driving under adverse conditions, see
page 283.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of
low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Cer-
tain variants have an oil pressure sensor, and
then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other
variants have an oil level sensor, and then the
driver is informed via the warning symbol in the
centre of the instrument unit as well as by dis-
play texts. Certain models have both variants.
Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord-
ance with the intervals specified in the Service
and Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-
ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
higher grade, see page 283.
For capacities, see page 284 and onwards.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially
important before the first scheduled oil change.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level every
2 500 km. The most accurate measurements
are made on a cold engine before starting. The
measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme-
diately after the engine is switched off. The
dipstick will indicate that the level is too low
because the oil has not had time to flow down
into the oil sump.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
210
Checking the oil
G020336
The oil level must be within the area marked on the
dipstick.
Measurement and filling if required
1. Ensure that the car is level. After switching
off the engine it is important to wait
5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back
to the sump.
2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.
3. Re-insert the dipstick.
4. Pull it out and check the level.
5.
If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres
should be added. If the level is significantly
below, then an additional amount is
required.
6. If required, check the level again, do it after
driving a short distance. Then repeat steps
1 - 4.
WARNING
Never fill above the MAX mark. The level
should never be above MAX or below MIN
as this could lead to engine damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
Washer fluid, topping up
G027097
Location of washer fluid reservoir.
The windscreen and headlamp washers have
the same reservoir. Use washer fluid with anti-
freeze during the winter to avoid freezing in the
pump, reservoir and hoses. See capacities on
page 285.
NOTE
Mix concentrated washer fluid with water
before filling.
TIP! Clean the wiper blades when topping up
washer fluid.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
211
Checking and topping up the coolant
G027087
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather con-
ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk
of freezing increases with both too little and too
much coolant concentrate.
IMPORTANT
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo. New cars
are filled with coolant that can withstand
temperatures down to approximately
ca -35 °C.
See capacities on page 285.
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
not filled sufficiently, high local temperatures
could occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks)
to the cylinder head. Top up the coolant when
the level falls to the MIN mark.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expan-
sion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
IMPORTANT
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
about water quality, used ready-mixed
coolant in accordance with Volvo rec-
ommendations.
When changing coolant/replacing cool-
ing system components, flush the cool-
ing system clean with approved quality
tap water or flush with ready-mixed
coolant.
The engine must only be run with a well-
filled cooling system. Otherwise, tem-
peratures that are too high may occur
resulting in the risk of damage (cracks)
in the cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality, see the table under Fluids and
lubricants on page 285.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
212
Checking and topping up the brake and
clutch fluid
G000000
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-
voir
1
. The fluid level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
See the capacities and recommended fluid
grade on page 285.
The fluid should be changed annually on cars
driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent
braking, such as driving in mountains or tropi-
cal climates with high humidity.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
Checking and topping up the power
steering fluid
FULL
ADD
G026991
NOTE
Check the level frequently.
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The level must lie between
the ADD and FULL marks. See the capacities
and recommended grade on page 285.
NOTE
If a fault should arise in the power steering
system or if the car is without power and
must be towed, it can still be steered. How-
ever, the steering will be much heavier than
normal and it will require more effort to turn
the steering wheel.
1
Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades
09
213
Wiper blades
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
page 194.
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly.
Neglected maintenance shortens the serv-
ice life of the wiper blades.
Replacing the wiper blades, windscreen
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the other side.
1. Fold out the wiper arm and grasp the wiper
blade.
2. Press in the ribbed spring catch on the
wiper blade while lifting it off at the arm
extension.
3. Fit the new blade in reverse order and
check that it is properly secured.
Changing the rear window wiper blade
G026959
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades
09
214
2. Remove the wiper blade by moving it up/
out (see illustration) towards the tailgate.
3. Press the new wiper blade into position.
4. Check that the blade is firmly installed.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
215
Operation
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-
ditions and climatic conditions.
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tight-
ened.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is con-
nected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and cli-
mate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to
be recharged if the car is not used for a
longer time or when it is only driven short
distances. Extreme cold further limits star-
ting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-
mended or that the battery is connected to
a battery charger with automatic trickle
charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
Symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
The battery contains cor-
rosive acid.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
216
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Risk of explosion.
Must be taken for recy-
cling.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an
environmentally safe manner as it contains
lead.
Changing the battery
Removal
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching any
electrical terminals.
> The car's electrical system needs to
store the necessary information to the
control modules.
3. Unscrew the bracket and cover over the
battery
4. Detach the black negative cable.
WARNING
Connect and remove the positive and neg-
ative cables in the correct order.
5. Detach the red positive cable.
6. Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-
tery.
7. Release the clamp securing the battery.
8. Remove the battery.
Fitting
DRAIN PIPE
xxxx xxxxx xx xxxxx
DISCONNECT
REMOVAL OF BATTERY
O CABLE FIRST
xxxx xxxxx xxxxx
xxxx xx
+
-
WARNING
xxxx xxxxx xx xxxxx
G027076
1. Fit the battery into position.
2. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.
3. Connect the ventilation hose.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
217
> Check that it is correctly connected to
both battery and outlet in the body.
4. Connect the red positive cable.
5. Connect the black negative cable.
6. Fit the cover and bracket.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
218
General
All bulb specifications are given on page 291.
The following list contains locations of bulbs
and other light sources that are specialised or
unsuitable for changing except at a workshop:
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon
lamps)
Daytime running lights (DRL) in the bumper
Direction indicators, door mirror and
approach lighting
Reading lamps and glovebox lighting
General interior lighting in the roof
Position lamps, rear
Brake light
High-level brake light
In the event of a fault in the daytime running
lights (DRL) in the bumper the whole lamp
insert is replaced.
In the event of a fault in the rear position lamps
or brake lights the whole rear light cluster is
replaced.
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the
replacement of Xenon lamps must be car-
ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. Working with
Xenon lamps demands extreme caution
because the headlamp is equipped with a
high voltage unit.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease and oil from your fin-
gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the
reflector and then causing damage.
Changing front bulbs
G027081
The entire lamp insert must first be removed
when replacing dipped beam, main beam and
parking lamp bulbs. To replace one of these
bulbs, do the following and then consult the
instructions for the specific lamp.
Removing the lamp housing:
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote
control key to position 0.
2. Open the bonnet.
3. Release the insert by pulling up the two
lock pins holding it in place.
4. Lift the insert straight out.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
219
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con-
nector
5. Unplug the connector by first pressing in
the catch from underneath and then pulling
it up a bit from above.
6. Lift out the entire headlamp insert and
place it on a soft surface so as not to dam-
age the lens.
G027083
Refit the headlamp insert in reverse order.
Check that the lock pins are correctly situated.
Location of bulbs in front lamp
G027082
Dipped beam
Main beam
Direction indicators
Parking/position lamps
Side marker lamps
Dipped beam, halogen
G027088
1. Undo the outer cover by turning it anti-
clockwise.
2. Unplug the connector.
3. Disconnect the spring clamp. First push to
the right so that the spring clamp discon-
nects, then out and down.
4. Pull out the lamp.
5. Fit the new bulb. It can only fit in one posi-
tion.
6. Press the clamp spring upwards and a little
to the left so that it secures in its catch.
7. Press the connector back in place.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
220
8. Screw the cover back into place; the mark-
ing HAUT should be at the top.
Main beam
Halogen headlamps
G027085
1. Undo the outer cover by pulling it straight
out and then unplug the connector.
2. Disconnect the spring clamp. First push to
the right so that the spring clamp discon-
nects, then out and down.
3. Pull out the lamp.
4. Fit the new bulb. It can only fit in one posi-
tion.
5. Press the clamp spring upwards and a little
to the left so that it secures in its catch.
6. Press the connector back in place and refit
the cover.
Side marker lamps and position/
parking lamps
G028409
The bulbs are housed in bayonet holders.
1. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise and
remove.
2. Pull the bulb straight out.
3. Fit the new bulb by carefully pressing it into
the recess.
4. Fit the bulb holder back in place and turn
clockwise.
Direction indicators
G027089
The bulbs are housed in bayonet holders.
1. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise and
remove.
2. Press in the bulb, turn anticlockwise and
remove.
3. Fit the new bulb by pressing it into the
recess and then turning clockwise.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
221
Bulbs in rear lamp cluster
Direction indicators
Reversing lamp
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recom-
mend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
222
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Bulb replacement
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote
control key to position 0.
2. Lower the bottom of the tailgate and open
the floor hatch. (If the car is equipped with
a grocery bag holder* undo the holder's
retaining straps.)
3. Remove the corner piece.
4. Open the hatch in the side panel by pulling
the catch up and towards you.
5. Take spanner no. 10 out of the tool kit and
undo the nuts.
6. Pull the entire insert straight back.
7. Loosen the extra length of cable for better
accessibility.
8. Place the insert on a soft surface so as not
to scratch the glass.
9. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise and pull
it out.
10. Turn the bulb anticlockwise to loosen it.
11. Replace the bulb.
12. Refit the bulb holder in the recess and turn
clockwise.
13. Press back the extra length of cable.
14. Refit the insert against the bolt holes. Press
the insert into place.
15. Tighten the nuts.
16. Refit the side panel and corner piece.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
``
223
Rear fog lamp
1. Insert a slotted screwdriver as indicated by
the arrow in the illustration.
2. Prise out the lamp insert.
3. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise to
loosen it.
4. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and lift the
bulb out.
5. Replace the bulb.
Number plate lighting
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote
control key to position 0.
2. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
3. Carefully detach the entire lamp housing
and withdraw it.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. Refit the entire lamp housing and screw it
into place.
Courtesy lighting
G027079
There is courtesy lighting under the instrument
panel on the driver and passenger sides.
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the lens detaches.
2. Remove the blown bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb.
4. Refit the lens.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
224
Bulb in cargo area
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Remove the blown bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb. Check that the bulb lights.
4. Refit the lamp housing.
Vanity mirror lighting
Removal of lamp lens
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens
and gently prize up the lock lugs on the
edge.
2. Snap off the lamp lens.
3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb
straight out to the side and replace with a
new one. Note! - Do not pinch hard with the
pliers. Otherwise the lamp lens could then
be crushed.
Attaching the lamp lens
1. Refit the lamp lens.
2. Press it into place.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
225
General
G032337
Cable routing may vary slightly due to engine variant. However, the components listed are in the same positions.
All electrical functions and components are
protected with a number of fuses to protect
your car's electrical system from damage by
short-circuits or overloads.
The fuses are in five different locations in the
car:
Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment.
Fuse box in the passenger compartment
within the sound barrier on the driver's
side.
Fuse box in the passenger compartment at
dashboard end on driver's side.
Fuse box in cargo area.
Fuse box in cargo area - Executive*.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, this may be because the component's
fuse was temporarily overloaded and blew.
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi-
cant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
There are a number of spare fuses in the cover
on the end face of the instrument panel. There
are also pliers which facilitate the removal and
fitting of fuses.
If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a
fault in the component. In which case, Volvo
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
226
recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop for this to be checked.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
227
Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment
G026972
1. ABS 30 A
2. ABS 30 A
3. High-pressure washer, head-
lamps
35 A
4. Parking heater* 25 A
5. Auxiliary lamps* 20 A
6. Starter motor relay 35 A
7. Windscreen wipers 25 A
8. Fuel pump 15 A
9. Transmission control module
(TCM)
15 A
10. Ignition coils (petrol), engine
control module (ECM), injec-
tion valves, (diesel)
20 A
11. Accelerator pedal sensor
(APM), AC compressor
10 A
12. Engine control module (ECM)
(petrol), injection valves (pet-
rol), mass air flow sensor (pet-
rol)
15 A
mass air flow sensor (diesel) 5 A
13. Actuator motors, intake mani-
fold (6-cyl.)
10 A
Electronic throttle module
(ETM), solenoid valve, SWIRL
(air mixing valve), fuel pressure
regulator (diesel)
15 A
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
228
14. Lambda-sond (petrol) 20 A
Lambda-sond (diesel) 10 A
15. Crankcase ventilation heater
(petrol), AC connection (pet-
rol), solenoid valves, ECM,
(petrol), glow heating control
(diesel)
15 A
16. Dipped beam, left 20 A
17. Dipped beam, right 20 A
18. - -
19. Engine control module (ECM)
supply, engine relay
5 A
20. Position lamp 15 A
21. Vacuum pump (petrol) 20 A
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
229
Relay/fuse box in the passenger compartment within the sound barrier on the driver's side
G028412
1. Seat heating, right side 15 A
2. Seat heating, left side 15 A
3. Horn 15 A
4. - -
5. Infotainment system 10 A
6. - -
7. - -
8. Siren* 5 A
9. Brake lamp switch feed 5 A
10. Combined instrument panel
(DIM), climate control (CCM),
parking heater, power driver's
seat
10 A
11. Front seat, rear seat and
refrigerator socket*
15 A
12. - -
13. - -
14. - -
15. ABS, DSTC 5 A
16. Electronic power steering
(ECPS)*, Active Xenon head-
lamps - ABL*, headlamp lev-
elling*
10 A
17. Daytime running lights (DRL)
left
7.5 A
18. Daytime running lights (DRL)
right
7.5 A
19. - -
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
230
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
20. - -
21. Transmission control module
(TCM)
10 A
22. Main beam, left 10 A
23. Main beam, right 10 A
24. - -
25. - -
26. - -
27. - -
28. Power passenger seat*, Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE)*
A
5 A
29. Fuel pump 7.5 A
30. BLIS* 5 A
31. - -
32. - -
33. Vacuum pump (petrol) 20 A
34. Washer pump 15 A
35. - -
36. - -
A
See also fuse 8 in the section entitled "Relay/fuse box in the
passenger compartment at dashboard end on driver's side".
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
231
Relay/fuse box in the passenger compartment at dashboard end on driver's side
G032316
A decal which specifies the positions and amperages of the fuses is located in the end box cover.
1. Climate control system fan 30 A
2. Audio (amplifier)* 30 A
3. Power driver's seat* 25 A
4. Power passenger seat* 25 A
5. Control module, left front
door
25 A
6. Control module, right front
door
25 A
7. - -
8. Radio, CD player, Rear
Seat Entertainment
(RSE)*
A
15 A
9. RTI display, RTI unit MMM 10 A
10. OBDII, light switch (LSM),
Steering Angle Sensor
(SAS), Steering Wheel
Module (SWM)
5 A
11. Ignition switch, SRS-sys-
tem, engine control mod-
ule ECM (petrol) SRS
deactivation passenger
side (PACOS), electronic
immobiliser (IMMO),
Transmission control
module (TCM)
7.5 A
12. General lighting, ceiling
(RCM) Upper electronic
module (UEM)
10 A
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
232
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
13. Sunroof* 15 A
14. Telematics*, Bluetooth* 5 A
15–38. - -
A
See also fuse 28 in the section entitled "Relay/fuse box in
the passenger compartment within the sound barrier on the
driver's side".
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
233
Fuses in the cargo area
1. Reversing lamp 10 A
2. Position lamps, rear fog lamp,
cargo area lighting, number
plate lighting, lamps in brake
lighting
20 A
3. Accessories (AEM)* 15 A
4. - -
5. REM electronics 10 A
6. - -
7. Towing bracket wiring* (30-
feed)
15 A
8. Electrical socket, cargo area 15 A
9. Rear right door: Power win-
dow, power window lock
20 A
10. Rear left door: Power window,
power window lock
20 A
11. - -
12. - -
13. Diesel filter heater 15 A
14. Rear air conditioning (A/C)* 15 A
15. - -
16. - -
17. Infotainment system accesso-
ries*
5 A
18. - -
19. Rear wiper 15 A
20. Towing bracket wiring* (15-
feed)
20 A
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
234
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
21. - -
22. - -
23. AWD 7.5 A
24. - -
25. - -
26. Park Assist* 5 A
27. Main fuse: Towing bracket
wiring, parking assistance,
AWD
30 A
28. Central locking system (PCL) 15 A
29. Trailer lighting, left: Position
lamps, direction indicator*
25 A
30. Trailer lighting, right: Brake
light, rear fog lamp, direction
indicator*
25 A
31. Main fuse: Fuse 37, 38 40 A
32. - -
33. - -
34. - -
35. - -
36. - -
37. Rear window defroster 20 A
38. Rear window defroster 20 A
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
235
Fuses in the cargo area - Executive*
The fuse box is located behind the cover panel
on the left-hand side.
1. Relay, seat heating, rear seat,
Relay, massage seat, front
5 A
2. Seat heating, rear seat, left 15 A
3. Seat heating, rear seat, right 15 A
4. Ventilated seat front, Massage
seat front
10 A
5. - -
6. - -
236
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 238
Control panels, audio............................................................................ 239
Audio system functions......................................................................... 242
Radio functions..................................................................................... 247
CD functions......................................................................................... 253
Menu structure – audio system............................................................. 255
Phone functions*................................................................................... 256
Menu structure – phone........................................................................ 263
Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 266
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen* ....................... 272
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
10 Infotainment system
General
10
238
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Infotainment system
Infotainment is a system that integrates the
audio system and phone functions.
You can easily and conveniently use your Info-
tainment system by means of the joint control
panel or the steering wheel keypad.
XC90 can be equipped with Dolby Surround
Pro Logic II
1
. This offers an optimal sound
experience very close to being there with a
broad, natural sound profile.
The system also allows your passengers to use
headphones* with separate audio sources.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II
1
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes the two
stereo audio channels to left, centre, right and
rear speakers. This provides a more realistic
sound quality than that provided by standard
two-channel stereo.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the
Dolby icon are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System
is manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
1
Applies to Premium Sound.
10 Infotainment system
Control panels, audio
10
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
239
Audio controls
CD – shortcuts
VOLUME - Volume (knob control)
POWER - Audio On/Off
AM/FM-shortcut between FM1, FM2 and
AM
Display
ENTER - select in the menu, activate a
selection or access the folder structure and
start playback of audio files if there is a disc
containing audio files in the CD player. For
more information, see page 253.
PHONE - Phone On/Off/Standby
MY KEY – programmable shortcut key for
your favourite function
SELECTOR - select audio source (rotary
control)
SOUND – audio settings
EXIT/CLEAR – scroll back in the menu,
cancel a selection, put the phone in
standby mode, or erase the previous char-
acter when entering text and numbers
SIM card holder
MENU – menu selection buttons
CD and CD changer eject*
CD player and CD changer*
Seek/change tracks/stations or scroll for-
ward and back when entering text and dig-
its
Station setting buttons/selecting CD
changer position* (1-6), number and char-
acter buttons for the phone and menu
shortcuts
IR* - receiver for remote controls
10 Infotainment system
Control panels, audio
10
240
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Steering wheel keypad
Audio – Phone*
The four buttons at the bottom of the steering
wheel keypad control both the radio and the
phone. The function of the respective button
depends on which system is active. The steer-
ing wheel keypad can be used to adjust vol-
ume, switch between preset stations and
change CD tracks. The two upper buttons in
the keypad (Yes and No) are used to answer
and end phone calls respectively. To change
between audio menu and phone menu, press
No.
Menus
G027112
Some infotainment system functions are con-
trolled via a menu system. The current menu
level is shown at the top right of the display.
Menu options are shown in the middle of the
display.
MENU leads to the menu system. Up/
down with the buttons
scrolls between
menu options.
ENTER selects or activates/deactivates a
menu option.
EXIT leads back one step in the menu
structure. A long press on EXIT will exit the
menu system.
Shortcuts
Menu options are numbered and can also be
selected directly with the keypad 1-6.
My own shortcut button – MY KEY
Use MY KEY to store a favourite function in the
menu, e.g. TP.
Select the function in the menu to be
stored by holding MY KEY depressed for
more than two seconds.
When
My Key stored. is shown in the display,
the function has been stored.
Activate the function with a short press on
MY KEY.
Functions that can be stored with MY
KEY
Random
Disc text
TP
News
Radio text
PTY scan
AF
Regional
Surround
10 Infotainment system
Control panels, audio
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
241
Control panel with headphones
socket*
G026982
Headphones with an impedance of
16 – 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher
are recommended for best sound reproduc-
tion.
Activate/deactivate
The control panel is activated with SEL when
the audio system is active. Deactivation is
automatic when the audio system is deacti-
vated or with a long press on SEL.
Scroll/search forward and backward
Short presses on / are used to scroll
between CD tracks or preset radio stations.
Long presses are used to fast-wind CD tracks
or to search for radio stations automatically.
Limitations
The audio source (FM, AM, CD etc.) played
back in the speakers cannot be controlled from
the rear control panel.
RDS messages may not appear if the radio is
playing back in the headphones while another
audio source is playing back in the speakers.
10 Infotainment system
Audio system functions
10
242
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
On/Off switch – Audio
G027115
Press the POWER button to switch the
audio system on or off.
If the audio system is active when the ignition
is switched off, it will reactivate automatically
when the car is restarted.
Volume control
Turn the knob clockwise or anticlockwise to
raise or lower the volume respectively. The vol-
ume control is electronic and has no end posi-
tion. Volume can also be raised (+) or lowered
() using the steering wheel keypad.
Selecting the audio source
Press the AM/FM button repeatedly to tog-
gle between FM1, FM2 and AM. The CD button
activates the CD player/changer.
Turn SELECTOR
to toggle between the
external audio sources - AUX, USB* and BT*
and the internal audio sources CD and CD
changer*.
External audio sources
AUX
The AUX AUX input can be used for connecting
an iPod or an MP3 player.
AUX input and audio switch for AUX/RSE*.
AUX input (3.5 mm)
Audio switch AUX/RSE*
If the car is equipped with RSE* then there is a
switch for audio from AUX and RSE. The
switch can be in two positions:
AUX - The audio from an external audio
source is played back through the audio
system.
RSE - The audio from the RSE is played
back through the audio system.
10 Infotainment system
Audio system functions
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
243
IMPORTANT
The cover for the cup holders must be open
when the connector is in the AUX input.
NOTE
The audio quality may be impaired if the
player is charged while the audio system is
in AUX mode. In which case, avoid charging
the player.
Sometimes the external AUX audio source can
be heard at a different volume to the internal
audio sources. The audio quality may be
impaired if the audio volume from the external
audio source is too high or too low. Prevent this
by adjusting the input volume of the external
audio source:
1.
Select
AUX input volume in the menu and
press ENTER.
2.
Control the volume with SELECTOR or up/
down with the buttons
. Finish with
ENTER.
NOTE
Does not work for the steering wheel key-
pad.
USB*
USB connection*.
If you choose to connect an iPod, MP3 player
or a USB memory stick to the USB connec-
tion* then you can control the media via the
car's audio controls.
NOTE
Connect the media player/USB memory
stick to the cable and the port, put in the
parts, and close the glovebox.
1.
Select USB using the SELECTOR button.
>
Connect device appears on the dis-
play.
2.
Connect your iPod, MP3 player or USB
memory stick to the USB connection*, see
preceding illustration.
>
The text
Loading appears on the dis-
play when the system loads the file
structure on the storage media. This
takes a while.
When the loading is finished the track informa-
tion is shown on the display.
Now it is possible to fast-wind/change tracks
using the buttons
/ :
Short presses are used to scroll between
tracks.
Long presses are used to fast-wind tracks.
The steering wheel keypad can also be used
for this purpose.
NOTE
The system supports the playback of music
files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats.
However, there are variants of these file for-
mats that are not supported by the system.
The system also supports most iPod
mod-
els produced in 2005 or later. iPod
Shuffle
is not supported.
10 Infotainment system
Audio system functions
10
244
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
USB memory stick
To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick,
avoid storing any files other than music files in
the memory. It takes considerably longer for
the system to load storage media that contains
items other than compatible music files.
NOTE
The system supports removable media
which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the
FAT32 file system, and can handle a maxi-
mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. The
memory must have a capacity of at least 256
Mb.
iPod
An iPod
is charged and supplied with power
by the USB connection via the player's con-
nection cable. However, if the player's battery
is fully discharged then it must be charged
before being connected.
Streaming audio via Bluetooth
*
General
If the car is equipped with Bluetooth
hands-
free* and a mobile phone is connected then the
audio system can wirelessly play back stream-
ing audio files from the mobile phone. Naviga-
tion and control of the sound can be carried out
via the centre console buttons or via the steer-
ing wheel keypad*. In some mobile phones it is
also possible to change tracks from the phone.
To be able to play back the audio a device must
first be paired and connected to the car. For
information about pairing and connection, see
page 267. BT must also be selected as audio
source, see page 242.
NOTE
The Bluetooth
mobile phone must support
the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile (A2DP). The phone should use
AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise
some functions may not work.
NOTE
Not all mobile phones available in the mar-
ket are fully compatible with the
Bluetooth
function in the car's audio sys-
tem. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer or visit
www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones and external media
players.
Playback
Turn SELECTOR in order to select BT as audio
source.
Now it is possible to fast-wind/change audio
file using the buttons
/ :
Short presses are used to scroll between
audio files.
Long presses are used to fast-wind audio
files.
The steering wheel keypad can also be used
for this purpose.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeak-
ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-
bination of car model and audio system.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes
into account the level set for the volume con-
trol, radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls that are explained in these oper-
ating instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and Equal-
izer, are only intended for the user to be able to
adapt the sound reproduction according to
personal taste.
10 Infotainment system
Audio system functions
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
245
Audio settings
1.
Press the SOUND button
.
2.
Press the SOUND button repeatedly until
you come to the function you wish to set.
Choose between
BASS, TREBLE,
FADER, BALANCE, CENTRE* or
SURROUND*.
3.
Use the SELECTOR knob
to adjust the
level. The display shows a scale from min.
to max. position. The middle indicates the
normal position.
NOTE
The level for the centre speaker can only be
set if Dolby Pro Logic II (
DPL II) or three
channel stereo (
3-CH) is selected in the
menu.
Programme type Display
shows
Bass
BASS
Treble
TREBLE
Balance between the
left and right-hand
speakers
BALANCE
Balance between the
front and rear speakers
FADER
Level for centre speaker
CENTRE*
Level for surround
sound
SURROUND*
Surround*
Surround settings govern the spatial percep-
tion of the sound. The settings, including acti-
vating and deactivating for each respective
audio source, are made separately.
The
symbol in the display indicates that
Dolby Pro Logic II is active. There are three dif-
ferent settings for surround sound:
Pro Logic II
3 channels
Off (two channel stereo)
Activating/deactivating surround sound
1.
Press MENU, scroll to
AUDIO MODE and
press ENTER.
2.
Select
SURROUND and press ENTER.
3.
Select
Pro Logic II, 3 channels or Off and
press ENTER.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is a trademark
of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby Pro Logic II Surround System is manu-
factured under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
10 Infotainment system
Audio system functions
10
246
Equalizer front
1
This function is used to fine-tune the sound
from the front speakers.
1.
Select
AUDIO MODE in the menu and
press ENTER.
2.
Select
Equalizer front and press ENTER.
3. Use the menu selection buttons or the
SELECTOR knob to set the level.
4.
Press ENTER to select the next frequency.
You can select five frequencies.
5.
Press ENTER until you come to menu
mode to save any changes.
Equalizer rear
1
This function is used to fine-tune the sound
from the rear speakers.
1.
Select
AUDIO MODE in the menu and
press ENTER.
2.
Select
Equalizer rear and press ENTER.
3. Use the menu selection buttons or the
SELECTOR knob to set the level.
4.
Press ENTER to select the next frequency.
You can select five frequencies.
5.
Press ENTER until you come to menu
mode to save any changes.
1
Certain audio systems.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
``
247
Tuning
AM FM
WXYZ
*
AUTO
0
4
7
PQRS
GHI
5
JK L
TUV
8
1
ABC
2
POWER
V
CD
E
M
O
L
U
E
S
SOUND
#
SCAN
6
9
MNO
DEF
3
ENTER
PHONE
CLEAR
MENU
EXI T
MY KEY
R
O
C
T
L
E
G027114
1.
Select radio mode AM/FM1/FM2 using the
SELECTOR knob (3) or the AM/FM button
(1).
2.
A short press on the
or button
is used to search for the next strong sta-
tion.
3. Press one of the buttons again to search
again.
Manually seek known frequency
1.
Hold the
or button depressed.
MAN is shown in the display. The radio
slowly scrolls in the desired direction,
increasing its tempo after a few seconds.
2. Release the button when the desired fre-
quency shows in the display.
3. Frequency can be adjusted with a short
press on one of the arrow keys,
or
.
Manual adjustment mode stays in effect
five seconds after the last press.
Storing stations
To store a selected station under one of the
station setting buttons 09 (2):
1. Set the desired station.
2. Press and hold the required station storage
button. The sound mutes a few seconds.
Channel stored is shown in the display.
The station is now stored.
You can store up to 10 stations each for
AM,
FM1 and FM2, i.e. a total of 30 stations.
AUTOSTORE – autostoring stations
G027119
AUTO (1) seeks out the ten strongest radio sta-
tions and stores them automatically in a sepa-
rate memory. The function is especially useful
in areas where the radio stations and their fre-
quencies are unfamiliar.
Start autostoring
1.
Select wavelength using AM/FM.
2.
Hold AUTO (1) depressed until
Autostoring appears on the display.
Once
Autostoring disappears from the dis-
play, the stations are stored. The radio contin-
ues in Auto mode and
AUTO appears on the
display. The automatically stored stations can
now be selected using the 0 - 9 buttons. If there
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
248
is no station with an adequately strong signal
then the display shows
No station found.
Cancelling automatic storage of stations
Press EXIT.
Selecting an autostored preset
Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode pro-
vides access to the autostored presets.
1.
Briefly press AUTO (1).
AUTO appears in
the display.
2.
Press one of the 0 - 9 buttons.
3. The radio remains in Auto mode until it is
exited by a brief press on AUTO (1), EXIT
or AM/FM.
Scanning
SCAN (2) automatically searches through a
wavelength for strong stations. When a station
is found, it is played for approx. 8 seconds
before scanning is resumed.
Activating/deactivating Scan
1.
Select wavelength using AM/FM.
2.
Press SCAN (2) to activate.
SCAN appears
in the display.
3.
Close using SCAN or EXIT.
Storing a station
A selected station can be stored as a preset
while SCAN is active.
Press one of the 0 - 9 buttons and hold it
depressed until the message
Station
stored
appears on the display.
SCAN is interrupted and the stored station can
be selected as a preset.
RDS functions
1
RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters
into a network. An FM transmitter in such a
network sends information that gives an RDS
radio the following functions:
Automatically switches to a stronger trans-
mitter if reception in the area is poor.
Searches for programme form, such as
traffic information or news.
Receives text information on the current
radio programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
a selected range of its functions.
Volume control – NEWS/TP/ALARM
NOTE
If a CD for example is playing when the radio
receives a traffic bulletin, the CD player is
put in pause mode. The message is played
at the volume selected for that type of mes-
sage. Playback of the originally selected
audio source is then resumed at the previ-
ous volume. If volume is adjusted while the
bulletin is played, the new volume is saved
and used for the next bulletin.
News – NEWS
This function interrupts other sound sources,
e.g. CD, when a news broadcast starts.
1.
Select radio mode using the SELECTOR
knob or the AM/FM button.
2.
Select
News in the menu and press
ENTER.
3.
News appears on the display.
4.
Select
News again and press ENTER to
deactivate the
News function.
With this function, programmes from RDS sta-
tions that are news-coded will interrupt other
audio sources using the volume setting for this
specific purpose. As soon as the news broad-
1
The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
249
cast is finished, the audio system returns to the
previous audio source and resumes the previ-
ous volume setting.
If you do not wish to listen to a news item in
progress:
Press the EXIT button. The NEWS function
remains active and the radio waits for the
next news programme.
Traffic information – TP
This function interrupts other audio sources in
order to broadcast traffic information from RDS
stations. The message is heard at the volume
set for this specific purpose. As soon as the
message ends, the radio returns to the previ-
ous audio source and volume setting.
1.
Select
TP in the menu and press ENTER.
2.
TP appears on the display.
3.
Select TP again and press ENTER to deac-
tivate the TP function.
TP is shown in the display when this function
is active. If the set station can send traffic infor-
mation then
appears on the display.
Traffic information will only interrupt the sound
source if
is shown in the display.
If you do not wish to listen to a traffic bulletin
in progress:
Press the EXIT button. The
TP function
remains active and the radio waits for the
next traffic bulletin.
TP Search
This function allows you to listen to traffic infor-
mation when travelling between different coun-
tries and states in Europe without needing to
select a station.
1.
Select
RADIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
2.
Select
TP and press ENTER.
3.
Select
TP search and press ENTER.
To deactivate the function, select
TP search
again and press ENTER.
Radio text
Some RDS stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This informa-
tion can be indicated with text in the display.
1.
Press the MENU button.
2.
Select
Radio text in the menu and press
ENTER.
3.
Select
Radio text again and press
ENTER to deactivate.
Alarm
Alarms are transmitted automatically and the
function cannot be deactivated.
Alarm! is
shown in the radio display when an alarm mes-
sage is broadcast. This function is used to warn
motorists of major accidents and catastro-
phes, such as a bridge collapse or an accident
at a nuclear plant.
Programme types – PTY
The PTY function can be used to select differ-
ent programme types, such as pop or classical
music. Use the PTY function to select from
among the different programme types shown
in the list below.
Display of programme type
1.
Select
RADIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
2.
Select
PTY in the menu and press
ENTER.
3.
Select
Show PTY and press ENTER.
The PTY of the selected station is now shown
in the display.
NOTE
Not all radio stations have a PTY designa-
tion.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
250
Programme types
Current affairs
Religion
Varied speech
Country music
Documentary
Finance
Folk music
Leisure & hobby
Children's progs
Oldies music
Information
Jazz music
Serious classic
Culture
Light classic
Easy listening
National music
Programme types
Pop music
Travel
Rock music
Social affairs
Sport
Drama
Phone in
Education
Science
Weather & Metro
Other music
Searching for a specific programme type
This function helps you find programmes with
a specific focus by searching the entire fre-
quency band.
1.
Select FM 1 or FM 2 and press the
MENU button.
2.
Select
RADIO SETTINGS and press
ENTER.
3.
Select
PTY and press ENTER.
4.
Select
Select PTY and press ENTER.
5.
Press ENTER for one or more of the listed
programme types you select. The PTY
symbol in the display illuminates when the
first selection is made and the radio con-
tinues in standby for PTY.
6. Once you have selected all desired types,
select EXIT/CLEAR to exit the PTY list.
7.
Select
PTY scan and press ENTER. If the
radio finds a station with the selected pro-
gramme type, it is played through the
speakers.
8. If the radio finds a station that is unsuitable,
continue the search with the
/
buttons.
9. If no stations with the selected programme
type are found, the radio resumes its pre-
vious frequency. PTY then remains in
standby mode until the selected pro-
gramme type is broadcast, at which time
the radio automatically switches to the sta-
tion sending the selected programme type.
In order to deactivate
PTY standby, enter the
menu and select
Clear all PTY. The symbol
PTY disappears from the display and the radio
resumes normal mode.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
251
Traffic information – TP STATION
Here, you set from which station traffic infor-
mation is to be heeded.
Note that
must be shown in the display
for this to work.
Activating/deactivating TP STATION
Listen to the station from which traffic informa-
tion is to be heeded.
1.
Select
RADIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
2.
Select
TP and press ENTER.
3.
Select
TP-STATION and press ENTER.
4.
Select
Set current to activate or RESET
to deactivate and press ENTER.
NOTE
Now only traffic information from the stored
station will by played.
News – NEWS STATION
Here, you set from which station news is to be
heeded.
Note that the set station in question must be an
RDS station for this to work.
Activating/deactivating NEWS STATION
Listen to the station from which news is to be
heeded.
1.
Select
RADIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
2.
Select
NEWS STATION and press
ENTER.
3.
Select
TP-STATION and press ENTER.
4.
Select
Set current to activate or RESET
to deactivate and press ENTER.
NOTE
Now only news from the stored station will
by played.
Automatic frequency update – AF
The AF function selects one of the strongest
transmitters for a set station. The radio may
sometimes need to search through the entire
FM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If
this occurs, the radio mutes and
PI Seek
Press EXIT to cancel
appears in the display.
Activating/deactivating AF
1.
Select
RADIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
2.
Select
AF and press ENTER.
To reactivate AF, select
AF and press ENTER.
Regional radio programmes – REG
This function causes the radio to continue with
a regional transmitter even if its signal strength
is low.
1.
Select
RADIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
2.
Select
Regional and press ENTER.
3.
REG appears on the display.
4.
To deactivate
REG, select REG again and
press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
252
Enhanced Other Networks – EON
The EON function is especially useful in urban
areas with many regional radio stations. It
allows the distance between the car and the
radio station transmitter to determine when
programme functions should interrupt the cur-
rent audio source.
Local – interrupts only if the radio station
transmitter is close.
Distant
2
– interrupts if the station trans-
mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of
static.
Off – no interruption for programmes from
other transmitters.
Activating/deactivating EON
1.
Select
RADIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
2.
Select
EON and press ENTER.
3.
Select
Local, Distant or Off and press
ENTER.
Resetting RDS functions
Resets all radio settings to the original factory
settings.
1.
Select
RADIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
2.
Select
Reset all and press ENTER.
3.
Press ENTER again to confirm.
2
Default/factory settings.
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
253
G027116
Starting playback (CD player)
If a music CD is in the player when the audio
system is in CD mode then playback is started
automatically. Otherwise, load a disc and
change to CD mode using SELECTOR (4) or
CD(1).
Starting playback (CD changer)
If a CD position with a music CD is already
selected when the audio system is activated
then playback starts automatically. Otherwise
change to CD changer mode using
SELECTOR (4) or CD (1) and select a disc with
the number buttons 1 - 6.
Inserting a CD (CD changer)
Select an empty position with the number
buttons 1 - 6 or Up/Down on the navigation
button.
An empty position is marked on the display.
The text
Insert disc shows that a new disc can
be inserted. The CD changer can hold up to
six CDs.
Insert a CD into the CD changer slot (2).
CD eject
A CD will stay in the ejected position for
max. 12 seconds. Following which it is re-
inserted in the player and playback continues.
Single discs (CD player)
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but-
ton (3).
All discs (CD changer)
Eject all discs with a long press on the eject
button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by
disc. The message
MATA UT is shown in the
display.
This function can only be activated if the car is
stationary. Eject is interrupted if the car begins
to move.
Pause
If the volume is turned down completely, the
CD player is stopped. The player is restarted
when volume is increased.
Audio files
Apart from normal music CDs, the CD player
supports MP3 and WMA format audio files.
NOTE
Certain types of copy-protected audio files
cannot be read by the player.
When a CD containing audio files is inserted
into the player the disc's directory structure is
read in. It may take a while before playback
starts due to the quality of the disc.
Navigation and playback
If a disc containing audio files is inside the CD
player then ENTER leads to the disc's direc-
tory structure. The directory structure is navi-
gated in the same way as the audio system's
menu structure. Audio files have the symbol
and directories have the symbol
. Before playback starts / can
be used to show the audio file's name if the
display is too narrow. Start playback of the
selected audio file with ENTER.
When the playback of a file is finished the play-
back of the other files in the same directory
continues. Directory change takes place auto-
matically when all files in the current directory
have been played back.
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
254
Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio
files
Short presses right/left on the / but-
tons are used to scroll between CD tracks/
audio files. Long presses are used to fast-wind
CD tracks/audio files. The steering wheel key-
pad can also be used for this purpose.
Scan CD
This function plays the first ten seconds of
each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to acti-
vate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue
playback of the current CD track/audio file.
Scan only works on the selected disc. The text
SCAN is shown in the display when the func-
tion is active.
NOTE
If disc text is activated then SCAN is not
shown in the display.
Random
This function plays the tracks in random order.
The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol-
led through in the normal way.
NOTE
It is only possible to scroll between random
CD tracks on the current disc.
Activating/deactivating (CD player)
If a normal music CD is being played:
Select
RANDOM in the menu and press
ENTER.
If a disc with audio files is being played:
Select
Disc or Folder in the menu and
press ENTER.
Activating/deactivating (CD changer)
If a normal music CD is being played:
1.
Select
Random in the menu and press
ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Single disc or All discs and press
ENTER.
The option
All discs only applies to the music
CDs in the changer.
If a CD with audio files is being played:
1.
Select
Single disc or Folder in the menu
and press ENTER.
2. Scroll to the required CD or folder and
press ENTER.
When you select another CD the function is
deactivated.
Different messages appear depending on
which random function is active:
RANDOM means that the tracks from only
one music CD are played.
RANDOM ALL means that all tracks on all
music CDs in the CD changer are played.
RANDOM Folder means that the audio
files in a directory on the current CD are
played.
NOTE
If disc text is activated then these messages
are not displayed.
Disc text
If title information is stored on a CD then it can
be shown in the display.
Activate/deactivate
Start CD playback.
Select
Disc text in the menu and press
ENTER.
CDs
Using CD discs burned at home could result in
poor or non-existent sound.
WARNING
Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter).
Do not use CDs with adhesive disc labels.
The heat in the CD player may cause the
label to come off, damaging the CD player.
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – audio system
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
255
FM-MENU
1
1. News
2. TP
3. Radio text
4. RADIO SETTINGS
4.1. PTY
4.2. TP
4.3. NEWS STATION
4.4. AF
4.5. Regional
4.6. EON
4.7. Reset all
5. AUDIO SETTINGS*
5.1. Surround
5.2. Equalizer front
5.3. Equalizer rear
5.4. Reset all
AM MENU
1.
AUDIO SETTINGS*
2
CD MENU
1. Random
2. News
3. TP
4. Disc text
5.
AUDIO SETTINGS*
2
AUX MENU
1. AUX input volume
2. News
3. TP
4.
AUDIO SETTINGS*
2
1
The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.
2
See FM MENU.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
256
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Phone system components
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
257
Phone system components
Steering wheel keypad* - You can control
the majority of phone functions using the
steering wheel keypad. When the phone is
active, the steering wheel keypad can only
be used for phone functions. When in
active mode, phone information is always
shown in the control panel display.
Microphone - The microphone for hands-
free is fitted in the roof by the sun visor.
SIM card reader - The SIM card is inserted
into the front of the control panel.
Centre console control panel - All phone
functions (except call volume) can be regu-
lated via the control panel.
Antenna - The antenna is mounted against
the windscreen, in front of the rearview
mirror.
General
Always put traffic safety first.
Switch off the phone system when refuel-
ling the car.
Switch off the system near blasting work.
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop carries out phone system
servicing.
Emergency calls
Emergency calls to alarm centres can be made
without a SIM card as long as there is coverage
by a GSM operator.
1. Activate the phone.
2. Ring the emergency number that applies to
your region (within EU: 112).
3.
Press ENTER in the control panel or in the
steering wheel keypad.
Controls
G027117
Display
ENTER – accept a call, make a menu
selection or activate the phone from
standby mode
On/Off/Standby
EXIT/CLEAR – terminate/refuse a call,
scroll back in the menu, cancel a selection
or erase entered digits/characters
SIM card holder
Menu selection buttons
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
258
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Number/character buttons and menu
shortcuts
Seek – scroll forward or back when enter-
ing text and numbers
Increase/decrease call volume during
calls. The phone does not use the centre
speaker*
On/Off/Standby switch
To activate the system:
Press the PHONE button (3) to activate the
phone system.
To switch off the system:
Hold the PHONE button depressed to
switch off the phone system
Continuing with system in standby mode:
1. The phone will continue in standby mode
with a brief press of the PHONE button or
if you press EXIT/CLEAR.
2.
Reactivate the system with the PHONE
button.
When the phone is active or in standby mode,
a handset is shown in the display.
If you switch off the car's ignition with the
phone system on, it will be on the next time you
switch on the ignition. No calls can be received
when the phone system is switched off.
Volume reduction during phone call
If the phone rings when the radio is switched
on, the volume is lowered when the call is
answered. When the call is concluded, the vol-
ume returns to the previously set level. Radio
volume can also be adjusted during a phone
call, whereby the newly selected level will
resume when the call is concluded. Audio sys-
tem volume can also be switched off com-
pletely during a phone call, see page 265.
This function only applies to the Volvo inte-
grated phone system.
Standby mode
In standby mode, you can receive calls while
the audio system is active and information from
audio system sources is shown in the display.
To use other functions of the phone system,
the phone must be in active mode.
Menu shortcuts
Once you have used the menu button to enter
the menu system, you can use numbers
instead of the arrows and the ENTER button to
select the right menu in the main menu level.
Each menu selection is numbered. The num-
bers are shown in the display together with the
menu alternative.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
259
Traffic safety
For reasons of safety, parts of the phone menu
system cannot be accessed at speeds in
excess of 8 km/h. You may only complete
menu system activities that have already been
started.
The speed limiter can be disconnected using
menu function 5.6.
SIM card
G026980
The phone can only be used with a valid SIM
card Subscriber Identity Module. Your network
operator supplies this card.
Always insert the SIM card when you wish to
use the phone.
1. Switch off the phone.
2. Open the SIM card holder with a short
press.
3. Insert the SIM card with the metallic sur-
face down.
4. Make sure that the bevelled corner of the
SIM card matches the bevel of the holder.
5. Press in the holder.
Contact your network operator if you experi-
ence difficulties with the SIM card.
Making and receiving calls
To call:
Dial the number and press ENTER on the
steering wheel keypad or control panel
keypad.
To receive an incoming call:
Press ENTER. You can also use Automatic
Answer, see page 265.
The car's audio system can be muted auto-
matically while a phone call is in progress, see
page 265.
Ending a call
Press EXIT/CLEAR on the steering wheel
keypad or control panel keypad.
The audio system resumes its previous activity.
Refuse an incoming call by pressing EXIT/
CLEAR.
Last dialled numbers
The phone automatically stores the last phone
numbers/names called.
1.
Press ENTER on the steering wheel or
control panel keypad.
2. Use the menu buttons to scroll forward or
back through the last numbers dialled.
They are shown in the display.
3.
Press ENTER.
Speed dial
Storing speed dial numbers
A number stored in the phone book can be
linked to a speed dial button (19).
Proceed as follows:
1.
Select
Phone book in the menu and press
ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
One-key dial (see page 265) and
press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
260
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3. Select which number is to be the speed dial
number. Press ENTER to confirm.
4. Search for the desired name or phone
number in the phone book. Press ENTER
to select.
Using speed dial
1. To make a call, press and hold the desired
speed dial button for about two seconds or
press the button briefly and then press
ENTER.
2. Once you switch on the phone, wait a
moment before using speed dial.
NOTE
If you wish to use a speed dial number then
Menu 3.4 must be activated. See Speed dial
under Description of menu options on page
264.
Call waiting
If you hear two beeps in your speaker during a
phone call, someone else is calling. This func-
tion can be selected or deselected in the menu.
When this occurs, you may accept or decline
the call. If you do not wish to take the call, press
EXIT/CLEAR or do nothing.
If you do wish to take the call, press ENTER.
Your current call will be put in "park mode". If
you press EXIT/CLEAR, both calls will be ter-
minated.
Functions during a call
The following functions are available during a
call (scroll with the arrows and press ENTER to
make a selection)
Secret mode/
Secret mode off
Secret mode
Hold/Resume
Choose if the call is
to be parked or
resumed
Phone book
Show phone book
The following functions are available when you
have a current call and a parked call (scroll with
the arrows and press ENTER to make a selec-
tion)
Secret mode/
Secret mode off
Secret mode
Phone book
Show phone book
Join
Speak with both
parties simultane-
ously (conference
call)
Swap
Switch between the
two calls
Call volume
Increase or decrease call volume during calls
by pressing the + or - buttons in the steering
wheel keypad.
When the phone is activated, the steering
wheel keypad only controls the phone func-
tions.
The phone must be in standby mode in order
to adjust the audio system with these buttons,
see page 258.
Phone book
Phone numbers and names can be stored in
either the phone memory or the SIM card mem-
ory.
If the number of the person calling is found in
the phone book, his or her name is shown in
the display.
The phone memory can store up to 255 names.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
261
Storing phone numbers with names
1.
Press the MENU button, select
Phone
book
and press ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
New number and press ENTER.
3.
Enter a name and press ENTER.
4.
Enter a number and press ENTER.
5. Choose in which memory to save and
press ENTER.
Dialling from the memory
AM FM
WXYZ
*
AUTO
0
4
7
PQRS
GHI
5
JK L
TUV
8
1
ABC
2
POWER
V
CD
E
M
O
L
U
E
S
SOUND
#
SCAN
6
9
MNO
DEF
3
ENTER
PHONE
CLEAR
MENU
EXI T
MY KEY
R
O
C
T
L
E
G027118
Press the MENU button's down arrow (1)
or
in the steering wheel to search in
the phone book.
Choose from the following alternatives:
1.
Press ENTER and scroll with the arrows
until you find the desired name.
2. Press the key for the first letter of the name
(or enter the entire name) and press
ENTER.
3.
Press ENTER to call the selected number.
Enter a name or message
Press the button with the desired character:
once for the first character, twice for the sec-
ond, etc. Press 1 to enter a space.
1
space 1- ? ! , . : " ' ( )
2
a b c 2 ä å à æ ç
3
d e f 3 è é
4
g h i 4 ì
5
j k l 5
6
m n o 6 ñ ö ò Ø
7
p q r s 7 ß
8
t u v 8 ü ù
9
w x y z 9
*
Used if two characters are to be
ended with the same button.
0
+ 0 @ * # & $ £ / %
#
Switch between upper and lower
case.
EXIT
Delete the last letter or number
entered. If you press for a long
time, the entire number and text is
deleted.
Quitting text input:
1. Clear all entered characters with a long
press on the EXIT/CLEAR button.
2. Return to the menu with an additional long
press on the EXIT/CLEAR button.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
262
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Double SIM cards
G026980
Many network operators offer double SIM
cards - one for your car and one for another
phone. A double SIM card allows you to have
the same number for two different phones. Ask
your network operator about the options avail-
able and the use of double SIM cards.
Specifications
Output 2 W
SIM card small, 3 V
Memory entries
255
A
SMS yes
Data/fax no
Dualband yes (900/1800)
A
The phone memory contains 255 positions. The number of
SIM card memory positions varies depending on your sub-
scription.
IMEI number
To block the phone, you must provide your
network operator with the phone's IMEI num-
ber. This is a 15 digit serial number that is pro-
grammed into the phone. Dial *#06# to show
this number in the display. Write it down and
keep it in a safe place.
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone
10
263
Overview
1. Call register
1.1. Missed calls
1.2. Received calls
1.3. Dialled no.
1.4. Erase list
1.4.1 All calls
1.4.2 Missed calls
1.4.3 Received calls
1.4.4 Dialled no.
1.5. Call duration
1.5.1 Last call
1.5.2 Call count
1.5.3 Total time
1.5.4 Reset timer
2. Phone book
2.1. Search
2.2. New number
2.3. Copy all
2.3.1 SIM to phone
2.3.2 Phone to SIM
2.4. Speed dial
2.4.1 Active
2.4.2 Select numbers
2.5. Erase SIM
2.6. Erase phone
2.7. Memory status
3. Messages
3.1. Read
3.2. Write
3.3. Message settings
3.3.1 SMSC number
3.3.2 Validity time
3.3.3 Message type
4. Call options
4.1. Send my no.
4.2. Call waiting
4.3. Automatic answer
4.4. Automatic redial
4.5. Voice mail number
4.6. Diversions
4.6.1 All calls
4.6.2 When engag.
4.6.3 Not answered
4.6.4 Not reachable
4.6.5 Fax calls
4.6.6 Data calls
4.6.7 Cancel all
5. Change phone
5.1. Car phone
5.2. Add phone
5.3.
Added phones
1
NOTE
The menu above only applies to cars with
Bluetooth
TM
handsfree.
6. Tel. settings
6.1. Network
6.1.1 Automatic
6.1.2 Manual select
6.2. SIM security
6.2.1 On
6.2.2 Off
1
Max. 3 phones.
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone
10
264
6.2.3 Automatic
6.3. Change PIN code
6.4. Audio
6.4.1 Ring volume
6.4.2 Ring signal
6.4.3 Mute radio
6.4.4 Msg. beep
6.5. Factory settings
Description of menu options
1. Call register
1.1. Missed calls
List of missed calls. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.2. Received calls
List of received calls. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.3. Dialled no.
List of dialled numbers. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.4. Erase list
Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2 and
1.3 as below.
1.4.1. All
1.4.2. Missed
1.4.3. Received
1.4.4. Dialled
1.5. Call duration
Duration of all calls or of the most recent call.
The phone code is required to reset the call
timer (see menu 5.4).
1.5.1. Last call
1.5.2. Call count
1.5.3. Total time
1.5.4. Reset timer
2. Phone book
2.1. Search
Search for a name in the phone book.
2.2. New number
Store names and phone numbers in the phone
book, see page 260.
2.3. Copy all
Copy phone numbers and names from the SIM
card to the phone memory.
2.3.1. From SIM to phone memory
2.3.2. From phone to SIM memory
2.4. Speed dial
A number stored in the phone book can be
stored as a speed dial number.
2.5. Erase SIM
Erase the entire SIM card memory.
2.6. Erase phone
Erase the entire phone memory.
2.7. Memory status
Shows how many positions are occupied in the
SIM card and phone memory. The table shows
how many of the total number of positions are
occupied, e.g. 100 (250).
3. Messages
3.1. Read
Received text messages. Select whether to
erase, forward, change or save the entire mes-
sage or parts of it.
3.2. Write
Write a message using the keypad. Choose
whether to save or send it.
3.3. Message sett
Enter the number (SMSC number) of the mes-
sage centre to which messages are to be trans-
ferred as well as how long they are to be saved
at the message centre. Contact your network
operator for information on message settings.
Normally, these settings should not be altered.
3.3.1. SMSC number
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone
10
265
3.3.2. Validity time
3.3.3. Message type
4. Call options
4.1. Send my no.
Displays or hides your phone number to/from
the person you call. Contact your network
operator regarding ex-directory numbers.
4.2. Call waiting
Be alerted during a phone call that there is
another incoming call.
4.3. Auto answer
Automatically answers incoming calls.
4.4. Call back
Calls a previously engaged number.
4.5. Voice mail number
Stores voice mail number.
4.6. Diversion
Choose when and what type of calls are to be
diverted to a specified phone number.
4.6.1. All calls
This setting only applies during the call in pro-
gress.
4.6.2. When engag.
4.6.3. Not answered
4.6.4. Not reachable
4.6.5. Fax calls
4.6.6. Data calls
4.6.7. Cancel all
5. Change phone
5.1. Car phone
Select the built-in phone.
5.2. Add phone
Add mobile phones to the list Added phones.
5.3. Added phones
Select to connect to one of the added phones
(up to 3 phones).
NOTE
The menu above only applies to cars with
Bluetooth
TM
handsfree.
6. Phone settings
6.1. Network
Choose a network automatically or manually.
The selected network is shown in the display in
the phone's basic mode.
6.1.1. Auto
6.1.2. Manual select
6.2. SIM security
Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if the
phone should automatically give the PIN code.
6.2.1. On
6.2.2. Off
6.2.3. Automatic
6.3. Change PIN code
Change PIN code. Write down and save the
code in a safe place.
6.4. Sounds
6.4.1. Volume
Adjust the ring tone volume.
6.4.2. Ring signal
There are five different ring signals.
6.4.3. On/off
Mute radio.
6.4.4. Msg. beep
6.5. Factory default
Reset the system's factory settings.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
266
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
System overview.
Mobile phone
Microphone
Steering wheel keypad*
Centre console control panel
Bluetooth
TM
A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth
TM
can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys-
tem. The audio system then works handsfree,
with the option to control a range of the mobile
phone's functions remotely. The microphone is
fitted in the headlining by the sun visor (2). The
mobile phone can be operated by its own keys
irrespective of whether or not it is connected.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the handsfree function.
Volvo recommends that you seek assis-
tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones.
Phone functions, controls overview
Centre console control panel.
VOLUME - volume, same functionality
available in steering wheel keypad*.
Display
ENTER – accept a call, make a menu
selection or activate the phone from
standby mode.
PHONE – on/off/standby.
EXIT – terminate/refuse a call, scroll back
in the menu, cancel a selection or erase
entered digits/characters.
MENU - leads to the menu system. Up/
down with the buttons scrolls between
menu options.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
267
Seek – scroll forward or back when enter-
ing text and numbers.
Number/character buttons and menu
shortcuts.
Remember
The menus are controlled from the centre con-
sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen-
eral information on menus, see page 240.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with both
Bluetooth
TM
handsfree and built-in phone
then there is an additional menu in the
phone menu, see page 270.
Activate/deactivate
A short press on PHONE activates the hands-
free function. The text
PHONE at the top of the
display shows that it is in phone mode. The
symbol
shows that the handsfree func-
tion is active.
One long press on PHONE deactivates the
handsfree function and disconnects a con-
nected phone.
Connect mobile phone
A mobile phone is connected in different ways
depending on whether or not it has been con-
nected previously. To connect a mobile phone
for the first time, follow the instructions below:
Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system
1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible
via Bluetooth
TM
, see the mobile phone's
manual or www.volvocars.com.
2. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE.
>
Menu option
Add phone appears on
the display. If one or more mobile
phones have already been registered
then these are also shown.
3.
Select
Add phone.
> The audio system searches for mobile
phones in the vicinity. The search takes
approximately 30 seconds. The mobile
phones detected are specified with their
respective Bluetooth
TM
name in the dis-
play. The handsfree function's
Bluetooth
TM
name is shown in the
mobile phone as
My Volvo Car.
4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the
audio system display.
5. Enter the number series shown in the audio
system display via the mobile phone key-
pad.
Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system
1. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE. If there is a phone connected,
disconnect the connected phone.
2.
Search with the phone's Bluetooth
TM
, see
the mobile phone's manual.
3.
Select
My Volvo Car in the list of units
detected in your mobile phone.
4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile
phone when prompted for the PIN code.
5.
Select to connect to
My Volvo Car from
the mobile phone.
The mobile phone is registered (paired) and
connected automatically to the audio system
while the text
Synchronising is shown in the
display. For more information on how mobile
phones are registered, see page 269.
When the connection is established the symbol
is shown and the mobile phone's
Bluetooth
TM
name is shown in the display. Now
the mobile phone can be controlled from the
audio system.
To call
1.
Make sure that the text
PHONE is shown
at the top of the display and that the
symbol is visible.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
268
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 269.
3.
Press ENTER.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
mobile phone moves out of the audio system's
range. For more information on connection,
see page 269.
Manual disconnection takes place by deacti-
vating the handsfree function with one long
press on PHONE. The handsfree function is
also deactivated when the engine is switched
off.
When the mobile phone has been discon-
nected an ongoing call can continue with the
mobile phone's built-in microphone and
speaker.
NOTE
Some mobile phones require that the trans-
fer from handsfree is confirmed from the
mobile phone's keypad.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call
Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the
audio system is in CD or FM mode for example.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
Automatic answer
The automatic answer function means that
calls are accepted automatically. Activate/
deactivate under PHONE MENU
CALL
OPTIONS
Automatic answer.
In call menu
Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call
to access the following functions:
Mute microphone - audio system micro-
phone is muted.
Move call to mobile - the call is transfer-
red to the mobile phone.
NOTE
With certain mobile phones the connection
is terminated when the privacy function is
used. This is normal. The handsfree function
asks if you want to reconnect.
Phone book – searching in the phone
book.
NOTE
A new call cannot be started during an
ongoing call.
Audio settings
Phone call volume
Call volume can be adjusted during calls. Use
the steering wheel keypad*.
Audio system volume
In phone mode (PHONE) the audio system vol-
ume can be adjusted as usual with VOLUME.
The audio source can be automatically muted
for incoming calls under PHONE MENU
PHONE SETTINGS SOUNDS AND
VOLUME
Mute radio.
Ring volume
Go to PHONE MENU PHONE SETTINGS
SOUNDS AND VOLUME Ring signal
volume and adjust with
/ on the control
panel in the centre console.
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring sig-
nals that can be selected under
PHONE MENU
PHONE SETTINGS
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
269
SOUNDS AND VOLUME Ring signals
Ring signal 1 etc.
NOTE
The connected mobile phone's ring signal is
not deactivated when one of the handsfree
system's integrated signals is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring
signal
1
, go to PHONE MENU PHONE
SETTINGS
SOUNDS AND VOLUME
RING SIGNALS Use mobile phone signal.
More on registering and connecting
A maximum of 3 mobile phones can be regis-
tered. Registration is performed once per
phone. After registration the mobile phone is in
the list of added phones. Not more than one
mobile phone can be connected at a time.
Phones can be deregistered under PHONE
MENU
BLUETOOTH Remove phone.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the
last mobile phone connected is in range it is
connected automatically. When the audio sys-
tem searches for the last phone connected its
name is shown in the display. To change over
to manual connection of another phone, press
EXIT.
Manual connection
If you want to connect a mobile phone other
than the last connected or change the con-
nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:
Set the audio system in phone mode
(
PHONE) and follow the instructions on the
display or change the connected mobile phone
by using the menu system as described below.
The menu structure is available in two variants
depending on whether the car only has
Bluetooth
TM
or if the car also has a built-in
phone.
For cars with only Bluetooth
TM
the connec-
tion is made under PHONE MENU
BLUETOOTH Change phone Add
phone or select one of the previously con-
nected phones.
For cars with built-in phone and
Bluetooth
TM
the connection is made under
PHONE MENU
Change phone Add
phone or select one of the previously con-
nected phones.
Phone book
All use of the phone book presupposes that the
text
PHONE is shown at the top of the display
and that the
symbol is visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book from each registered mobile phone. The
phone book is copied automatically to the
audio system during each connection. Deacti-
vate the function under PHONE SETTINGS
Synch. phone book. Searching for contacts is
only performed in the connected mobile
phone's phone book.
NOTE
If the mobile phone does not support copy-
ing of the phone book then
The list is
empty
is shown when copying is finished.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the
display.
Searching for contacts
The easiest way to search in the phone book is
with long presses on the keys 2–9. This starts
a search in the phone book based on the key's
first letter.
1
Not supported by all mobile phones.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
270
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The phone book can also be reached with the
button on the control panel in the centre
console or with
on the steering wheel
keypad. Scroll between contacts with the
/
buttons or with / . The search can
also be carried out from the phone book's
Search menu under PHONEBOOK
Search:
1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and
press ENTER. Or simply press ENTER.
2.
Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to
call.
Voice recognition
The mobile phone's voice recognition function
for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the voice recognition func-
tion. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer or visit
www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones.
Voice mail number
Voice mail number can be changed under
CALL OPTIONS
Voice mail no.:. If there is
no number stored then this menu can be
reached with one long press on 1. Press 1 for
a long time to use the stored number.
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-
tion at each new connection and are then
updated during the connection. Press ENTER
to show the last dialled. Other call lists are
available under
CALL REGISTER.
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last
dialled numbers in reverse order.
Inputting text
Input text using the keypad in the centre con-
sole. Press once for the key's first character,
twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for
more characters, see the table on page 261.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-
acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input
characters.
/ on the control panel in the
centre console scrolls between the characters.
Menu structure -
Bluetooth
TM
handsfree
NOTE
The menu for Bluetooth
TM
handsfree is
available in two variants. For cars with only
Bluetooth
TM
handsfree and for cars with
built-in phone and Bluetooth
TM
handsfree.
1. CALL REGISTER
1.1. Last 10 missed
1.2. Last 10 received
1.3. Last 10 dialled
2. PHONEBOOK
2.1. Search
2.2. Copy to phone
3. BLUETOOTH
3.1. Change phone
3.1.1. Add phone
3.1.2.
Added phones
2
3.2. Remove phone
3.3. Connect fr. mobile phone
3.4. Bluetooth info. for the car
2
A maximum of 3 phones.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
271
4. CALL OPTIONS
4.1. Automatic answer
4.2. Voice mail no.
5. PHONE SETTINGS
5.1. SOUNDS AND VOLUME
5.1.1. Ring signal volume
5.1.2. Ring signals
5.1.3. Mute radio
5.2. Synch. phone book
Menu structure - Bluetooth
TM
handsfree with built-in phone
1. CALL REGISTER
1.1. Last 10 missed
1.2. Last 10 received
1.3. Last 10 dialled
2. PHONEBOOK
2.1. Search
2.2. Copy to phone
3. BLUETOOTH
3.1. Remove phone
3.2. Connect fr. mobile phone
3.3. Bluetooth info. for the car
4. CALL OPTIONS
4.1. Automatic answer
4.2. Voice mail no.:
5. Change phone
5.1. Car phone
5.2. Add phone
5.3.
Added phones
2
6. PHONE SETTINGS
6.1. SOUNDS AND VOLUME
6.1.1. Ring signal volume
6.1.2. Ring signals
6.1.3. Mute radio
6.2. Synch. phone book
2
A maximum of 3 phones.
10 Infotainment system
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
10
272
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
The RSE system can be used at the same time
as the car's infotainment system.
When the rear seat passengers are using DVD
or RSE-AUX while listening with headphones,
the driver and front seat passenger can still use
the car's radio or CD player.
Power consumption, ignition positions
The system can be activated in ignition position
I or II and while the engine is running. When the
car is being started the film stops temporarily
and continues when the engine has started.
When the system has been used once without
the ignition in position I it is blocked. To restart,
ignition position I must be activated.
NOTE
In the event of extended use (more than 10
minutes) with the engine switched off - the
capacity of the car's battery may decrease
to such a low level that the engine cannot
be started.
In which case a message will appear on the
screen.
Music
Playing back a CD disc
1. Insert the CD with the label side turned
from the buttons.
> The disc starts to play back automati-
cally.
2. Switch on the wireless headphones, select
CH A for left-hand screen or CH B for right-
hand screen.
> The sound is directed to the head-
phones.
3. Adjust the audio volume in the headphones
using the volume control/wheel on the
headphones.
Alternatively - activate the car's audio sys-
tem in MODE-AUX and press
A B
on
the remote control to listen via the speak-
ers.
Selecting within a disc directory
1. Load the disc.
2.
Press
.
3. Scroll using the navigation buttons to
select a file.
4.
Press
to select the subdirectory.
Different playback options
The disc can be played back in different ways,
scroll with the navigation buttons to select
playback option.
When the dialogue box appears:
1. Press the right-hand navigation button to
move over in the right-hand menu.
2. Scroll using the navigation buttons to
select playback options.
3.
Confirm with
.
Change CD track
Change CD track with
or
fast-wind by holding the buttons
depressed.
Pause
1.
Pause and restart the disc with
.
2.
Stop the disc with
.
3.
Press
again to eject the disc.
Discs copied privately can be used.
However, playback and quality depend on the
quality of the source file, format and disc qual-
ity.
10 Infotainment system
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
273
AUX input, Electrical socket 12 V
The input allows you to connect other equip-
ment. Always follow the instructions included
with the external equipment, or from the man-
ufacturer or reseller, when connecting. Equip-
ment connected via the RSE AUX input can use
the screens, wireless headphones, head-
phones sockets and the car's speakers.
NOTE
To be able to play back the audio from the
RSE in the car's audio system the audio
switch AUX/RSE must be in position RSE,
see page 242.
Connecting the RSE AUX input
G015700
The RSE-AUX input is located in the centre con-
sole under the DVD player.
1. Connect the video cable to the yellow
socket.
2. Connect the left-hand audio cable to the
white socket and the right-hand one to the
red socket.
3. Connect the power cable to the power
socket if your equipment is designed for
12 V.
System
Formats supported by the system.
Audio
format
CD-DA, DVD Audio Playback,
MP3, WMA
Video
format
DVD video, VCD, SVCD, DivX/
MPEG-4, WMA video, Photo CD
Kodak, Photo CD JPG
Disc
format
DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, DVD-RW,
DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, CD-R,
CD-ROM, CD-RW, CD-3, HDCD
Advanced system settings
These settings can only be accessed when the
DVD player is empty.
Press MEDIA MENU.
GENERAL SETUP
ANGLE MARK
CAPTION
AUDIO SETUP
COMPRESSION
DVX(R)
REGISTRATION
PREFERENCES
TV TYPE
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
DEFAULTS
10 Infotainment system
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
10
274
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Changing the battery in the remote
control and wireless headphones
The remote control and headphones are pow-
ered by 2 AAA batteries.
Take along extra batteries for a long journey.
G031359
Remote control
1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery
cover.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
batteries in accordance with the symbols
in the battery compartment and insert
them.
3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.
G030395
Wireless headphones
1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery
cover.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
batteries in accordance with the symbols
in the battery compartment and insert
them.
3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.
NOTE
If the system is too hot to be used or if bat-
tery voltage is too low then an information
message appears on the screen.
Environmental care
Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries
in an environmentally safe manner.
10 Infotainment system
10
275
276
Type designation................................................................................... 278
Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 280
Engine specifications............................................................................ 282
Engine oil............................................................................................... 283
Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 285
Fuel....................................................................................................... 287
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ......................................... 289
Catalytic converter................................................................................ 290
Electrical system................................................................................... 291
Type approval....................................................................................... 293
Symbols in the display.......................................................................... 294
SPECIFICATIONS
11 Specifications
Type designation
11
278
11 Specifications
Type designation
11
279
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facili-
tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer
regarding the car and when ordering spare
parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number. The label is visible when
the right rear door is opened.
Engine code and engine serial number.
6-cyl.
5-cyl.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial num-
ber:
automatic gearbox AW
manual gearbox
automatic gearbox
Label for parking heater.
The car's identification number (VIN –
Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
280
Dimensions
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2857
B Length 4807
C Load length, floor, folded seat 2018
D Load length, floor 1118
E Height 1784
F Load height, floor 872
G Front track 1634
Dimensions mm
H Rear track 1624
I Load width, floor 1064
J Width 1936
K Width including door mirrors 2112
L Width including folded-in door
mirrors
1936
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see
table) influences the payload and is not
included in the kerb weight.
Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicle
weight - Kerb weight.
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
281
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car with-
out extra equipment or accessories. This
means that for every accessory added the
loading capacity of the car is reduced cor-
respondingly by the weight of the acces-
sory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load-
ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as other
accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers,
Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps,
GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car-
pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-
taining the kerb weight of your own partic-
ular car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
For decal location, see page 278.
Gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Maximum roof load: 100 kg
Towing capacities and towball load
Engine Max. weight braked trailer, kg Max. towball load, kg
D4 FWD 1800 90
other 2250 90
Max. weight unbraked trailer, kg Max. towball load, kg
750 50
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
11
282
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Engine Engine
code
A
Output
(kW/rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/
rpm)
No. of
cylinders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept
volume
(litres)
Com-
pression
ratio
T5 B5254T9 154/5000 210/5000 320/1500-4500 5 83 92,3 2,497 9.0:1
3.2 B6324S5 179/6400 243/6400 320/3200 6 84 96 3.192 10.8:1
D5 D5244T18 147/3900 200/3900 420/1900-2800 5 81.0 93.15 2.400 17.3:1
D4
B
D5244T5 120/4000 163/4000 340/1750-3000 5 81.0 93.15 2.400 17.3:1
A
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 278.
B
Certain markets
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
283
Adverse driving conditions
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hot-
ter than +40 °C.
This can produce abnormally high oil tempera-
ture or oil consumption.
Also check the oil level more often if the car is
often driven short distances (less than 10 km)
when temperatures are low (below +5 °C).
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory.The choice of oil has
been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
284
Engine oil grade
Engine Engine code Recommended oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
T5 B5254T9
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30.
approx 5.5
3.2 B6324S5 approx 6.8
D5 D5244T18 approx. 5.7
D4
A
D5244T5 approx. 5.7
A
Certain markets
For filling engine oil, see page 209.
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
``
285
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
TF-80SC 7.0 AW1
AW55-51 7.7 JWS 3309
Fluids
Fluid System Volume
(litres)
Recommended oil grade
Coolant T5 8.7
Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% water
A
, see the packaging. The thermostat
starts opening at:
90 °C in petrol engines and at 82 °C in diesel engines
3.2 9.7
D4 and D5 8.7
Refrigerant Air condition-
ing
B
R134a (HFC134a)
Oil: PAG
Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+
Power steering
fluid
Power steering 1.0 WSS M2C204-A or equivalent product with same specifications.
of which reser-
voir
0.2
Washer fluid 6.5 Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and below
freezing point.
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
286
Fluid System Volume
(litres)
Recommended oil grade
Fuel Petrol engine approx. 80 Petrol: see page 137
Diesel engine approx. 68 Diesel: see page 137
A
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
B
Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.
IMPORTANT
The recommended transmission fluid must
be used to prevent damage to the gearbox.
Do not mix with any other transmission fluid.
If the transmission is topped up with a dif-
ferent fluid, contact a workshop nearby for
servicing. Volvo recommends that you con-
tact the nearest authorised Volvo workshop.
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions the gear-
box oil does not need changing during its
service life. However, it may be necessary
under adverse driving conditions, see
page 283.
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
``
287
CO
2
emissions and fuel consumption
3.2 AWD
374 (384)
A
16.1 (16.5)
A
203 (203)
A
8.7 (8.7)
A
265 (269)
A
11.4 (11.5)
A
D4
– (275)
A
– (10.5)
A
– (176)
A
– (6.7)
A
– (212)
A
– (8.1)
A
D5 AWD
– (275)
A
– (10.5)
A
– (180)
A
– (6.8)
A
– (215)
A
– (8.2)
A
A
The value in brackets applies to the variant seating seven.
Explanation
gram/km
litre/100 km
Urban driving
Extra-urban driving
Combined driving
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
table above are based on specific EU cycles
1
,
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic
version and without extra equipment. The car's
weight may increase depending on equipment.
This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded,
increases fuel consumption and carbon diox-
ide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel
consumption compared with the table's val-
ues. Examples of this are:
The driver's driving style.
If the customer has specified wheels larger
than those fitted as standard on the mod-
1
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation
no 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold starting
the engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. The value for combined driving, which is
reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in accordance with legal requirements. CO
2
emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the
carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO
2
emissions.
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
288
el's basic version, then resistance increa-
ses.
High speed results in increased wind resis-
tance.
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
Even a combination of the above-mentioned
examples can result in significantly improved
consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to
1
.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise
in a comparison with the EU driving cycles
1
which are used in the certification of the car
and on which the consumption figures in the
table are based.
To bear in mind
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce
consumption:
Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel-
eration as well as braking too hard.
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre
pressure table on page 289.
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump-
tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
See further information and more advice on
pages 13 and 134.
See page 139 for general information on fuel.
1
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation
no 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold starting
the engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. The value for combined driving, which is
reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in accordance with legal requirements. CO
2
emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the
carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO
2
emissions.
11 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
11
289
Approved tyre pressures
Engine Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1-3 persons Max. load
ECO pressure
A
Front (kPa)
B
Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa)
All
235/65R17
235/60R18
0-160 220 220 270 270 270
160+ 220 220 270 270 -
255/50R19
255/45R20
0-160 240 240 270 270 270
160 + 240 240 270 270 -
Temporary Spare Tyre 0–80 420 420 420 420 -
A
Economical driving, see page 181.
B
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa (270 kPa = 2.70 bar).
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
11 Specifications
Catalytic converter
11
290
General
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to
purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow of
exhaust gases close to the engine so that it
quickly reaches operating temperature. The
catalytic converter consists of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum,
rhodium and palladium. These metals act as
catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate
a chemical reaction without being used up
themselves.
Lambda-sond
TM
oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that con-
tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
to air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. Together with the three-way catalytic
converter, these adjustments create optimal
conditions for efficient combustion of the
harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon
monoxide and nitrous oxides).
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
291
General
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The electrical system is single-pole and uses
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The battery capacity is dependent upon the
equipment level in the vehicle.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, replace it with a
battery of the same cold start capacity and
reserve capacity as the original (see the
decal on the battery).
Battery
Voltage, V Cold start capacity,
CCA (Cold Cranking Amperes), A
Reserve capacity,
minutes
Capacity, Ah
12 600 120 70
12
800
A
150 90
A
Cars equipped with diesel engine or parking heater
Bulbs
Lighting Output (W) Type
Dipped beam, halogen 55 H7 LL
Main beam, halogen 55 H7 LL
Extra main beam, ABL 65 H9
Front direction indicators 21 HY21W
Position/Parking lamps, front; Side marker lamps, front; Courtesy lighting, rear 5 W5W LL
Side direction indicators, door mirrors 5 WY5W LL
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
292
Lighting Output (W) Type
Front courtesy lighting 5 Socket SV8.5 Length 38 mm
Glovebox lighting 5 Socket SV8.5 Length 43 mm
Vanity mirror lighting 2 T5 Socket W2x4.6d
Cargo area lighting 10 Socket SV8.5 Length 43 mm
Number plate lighting 5 C5W LL
Rear direction indicators 21 PY21WSV
Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL
Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL
11 Specifications
Type approval
11
293
Remote control key system
Country
EUROPE
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
11
294
General
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided into
warning, indicator and information symbols.
Shown below are the most common symbols
with their meanings and a reference to where
in the manual further information can be found.
For more information on symbols and text
messages, see pages 55 and 58 .
The
symbol illuminates with a red or
amber glow depending on the severity of the
fault. At the same time an explanatory text is
displayed in the information display.
Symbols in the display
Indicator and warning symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Warning 19, 55, 57,
152, 153
Emissions
system
55, 57
Symbol Meaning Page
Fault in the
ABS system
56, 150
Rear fog
lamp
57
Stability sys-
tem, DSTC
57, 152
Engine pre-
heater (die-
sel)
57
Indicator
symbol for
trailer
57
Parking
brake applied
57
Symbol Meaning Page
Airbags -
SRS
19, 57
Low oil pres-
sure
55, 56
Seatbelt
reminder
16, 56
Alternator not
charging
57
Fault in the
brake system
56, 149
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
11
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
295
Other information symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Cruise control* 70
Information symbols in the centre
console display
Symbol Meaning Page
Audio files 253
Directory in CD disc 253
G021220
Traffic information 249, 251
Information symbol in rearview mirror
Symbol Meaning Page
Airbag, passenger
seat, deactivated
23
12 Alphabetical Index
12
296
A
ABS fault.................................................... 56
Active Xenon headlamps..................... 60, 63
Adaptive system...................................... 146
Additional heater........................................ 95
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 171
halogen headlamp.............................. 171
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 73
AF – automatic frequency update........... 251
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22
driver's and front passenger side......... 21
key switch off........................................ 22
AIRBAG ..................................................... 20
Airbag system............................................ 20
Air conditioning.......................................... 88
ECC...................................................... 91
rear of passenger compartment........... 59
Air conditioning system
repair................................................... 208
Air distribution............................................ 89
Air distribution, A/C................................... 92
Air quality system, ECC............................. 91
Air vents
instrument panel................................... 89
Alarm
alarm indicator.................................... 129
alarm signals....................................... 130
arming................................................. 129
automatic alarm activation................. 130
deactivating a triggered alarm............ 130
disarming............................................ 129
general................................................ 129
reduced alarm level............................ 130
All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 148
Audio
headphones socket............................ 241
surround............................................. 245
Audio, see also Sound............................. 239
Audio files................................................ 253
Audio system
functions............................................. 242
Audio volume
phone.......................................... 258, 268
phone/media player............................ 268
ring signal, phone............................... 268
Auto, ECC.................................................. 92
Automatic car washes............................. 194
Automatic gearbox.......................... 145, 146
lock-up function.................................. 146
safety systems.................................... 147
towing and recovery........................... 159
trailer................................................... 163
W button............................................. 146
Automatic locking.................................... 124
Auxiliary lamps........................................... 60
AUX input................................................. 242
Average fuel consumption......................... 66
AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 148
B
Backrest
front seat, lowering............................... 98
Backrest rear seat, lowering.................... 110
Bag holder............................................... 117
Battery............................................. 215, 291
maintenance............................... 205, 215
overload.............................................. 135
specifications...................................... 291
start assistance................................... 161
symbols on the battery....................... 215
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 155
12 Alphabetical Index
12
297
BLIS................................................... 61, 155
Bluetooth
handsfree............................................ 266
mute microphone............................... 268
transfer call to mobile......................... 268
Bluetooth
media.................................................. 244
streaming audio.................................. 244
Boarding
rear seat.............................................. 110
Bonnet..................................................... 207
Bonnet, opening...................................... 207
Booster cushion
folding up.............................................. 39
lowering................................................ 40
Booster cushion, integrated...................... 39
Bottle holder for rear seat passengers.... 106
Brakes
anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 150
handbrake............................................. 72
Brake system........................................... 149
Bulbs, see Lighting.......................... 218, 291
C
Calls
functions during a call........................ 260
incoming............................................. 267
operation............................................. 267
Car care................................................... 194
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 196
Cargo area............................................... 113
bag holder........................................... 117
cargo area compartment.................... 118
cargo cover......................................... 117
electrical socket.................................. 117
lighting................................................ 103
loading................................................ 114
safety grille.......................................... 116
safety net............................................ 115
Cargo area compartment........................ 118
Cargo cover............................................. 117
Car upholstery......................................... 196
Car wash.................................................. 194
Catalytic converter........................... 140, 290
recovery.............................................. 160
CD
changer............................................... 253
CD functions............................................ 253
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 211
Checking the engine oil level................... 209
Children..................................................... 31
child safety locks.................... 40, 59, 128
child seats and airbags......................... 31
child seats and side airbags................. 24
location in the car................................. 31
location in the car, table....................... 32
safety.................................................... 31
Child safety locks...................................... 59
Child seats................................................. 31
extra locking function in seatbelt.......... 44
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 40
recommended...................................... 32
size classes for child seats with the ISO-
FIX fixture system................................. 40
upper mounting points for child seats.. 44
Cigarette lighter socket.............................. 60
Cleaning
car wash............................................. 194
rims..................................................... 194
seatbelts............................................. 197
upholstery........................................... 196
water-repellent surface......................... 80
Clock, setting............................................. 53
Clutch fluid, checking & topping up........ 212
12 Alphabetical Index
12
298
Coat hanger............................................. 106
Cold start
automatic gearbox.............................. 146
Collision
inflatable curtain, IC.............................. 26
Colour code, paint................................... 198
Combined instrument panel...................... 53
Compass................................................... 76
calibration............................................. 79
setting the zone.................................... 76
Condensation in headlamps.................... 194
Cooler box............................................... 109
Cooling system........................................ 134
Cruise control............................................ 70
Cup holder....................................... 106, 107
D
Deadlock
temporary deactivation....................... 126
Deadlocks
temporary deactivation of the alarm
detectors............................................. 130
Defroster.................................................... 93
Detectors................................................... 60
Diesel....................................................... 140
Diesel: engine preheater............................ 57
Diesel particle filter.................................. 141
Direction indicators.................................... 65
Display, messages..................................... 58
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 238
Door mirrors............................................... 79
Driver's door control panel.................. 52, 74
Driving
cooling system.................................... 134
economical......................................... 134
in water............................................... 134
slippery driving conditions.................. 136
with the tailgate open......................... 135
with trailer........................................... 163
Driving in water........................................ 134
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 280
towing capacity.......................... 163, 280
DSTC, see also Stability control sys-
tem..................................................... 57, 151
operation............................................. 151
E
ECC, electronic climate control........... 88, 91
Economical driving.................................. 134
ECO pressure.......................................... 181
table.................................................... 289
Electrical socket
cargo area........................................... 117
centre console...................................... 60
rear seat................................................ 73
Electrical system...................................... 291
Emergency calls...................................... 257
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 182
Emergency puncture repair..................... 188
Emission control
fault indicator........................................ 57
Engine compartment............................... 208
oil........................................................ 209
Engine oil......................................... 209, 283
adverse driving conditions.................. 283
capacities........................................... 283
filter..................................................... 209
oil grade.............................................. 283
oil pressure........................................... 56
12 Alphabetical Index
12
299
Engine preheater....................................... 57
Engine specifications............................... 282
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's
manual....................................................... 13
EON - Enhanced Other Networks............ 252
Equalizer.................................................. 246
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
External audio source
AUX-socket......................................... 242
USB connection.................................. 243
External dimensions................................ 280
F
Fan
ECC...................................................... 93
First aid equipment.................................. 184
Fluids, capacities..................................... 285
Fluids and oils.......................................... 285
Fluids and oils, checks, engine compart-
ment......................................................... 209
Fluids and oils general............................. 205
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 63
Front seat
lumbar................................................. 101
massage............................................. 101
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 13
Fuel
fuel consumption, display..................... 66
fuel economy...................................... 181
fuel filter.............................................. 141
parking heater....................................... 94
refuelling............................................. 137
Fuses....................................................... 225
box in cargo area................................ 233
box in cargo area - Executive............. 235
box in passenger compartment.......... 229
box in the engine compartment.......... 227
changing............................................. 225
end box............................................... 231
general................................................ 225
G
Gearbox
automatic............................................ 145
General information on fuel..................... 139
Glovebox................................................. 105
Gross vehicle weight............................... 280
H
Handbrake................................................. 72
Hazard warning flashers............................ 61
Headlamp levelling.................................... 62
Headlamp pattern, adjusting................... 171
Headlamp pattern adjustment
Active Bending Lights (ABL) .............. 171
Headlamps
ABL....................................................... 63
off/on.................................................... 62
Headlamp washers.................................... 69
Headphones socket................................. 241
Head restraint
centre seat, rear.................................. 111
Heater
fuel-driven............................................. 94
Heating
front seats............................................. 61
rearview and door mirrors.............. 61, 93
rear window.................................... 61, 93
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 69
HomeLink
................................................ 83
Home safe lighting
setting................................................... 65
12 Alphabetical Index
12
300
I
Ignition keys............................................. 144
IMEI number............................................ 262
Immobiliser...................................... 122, 144
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 26
Information display.................................... 58
Infotainment system................................ 238
Inlaid mats................................................. 98
Instrument lighting..................................... 63
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 48
right-hand drive.................................... 50
Integrated booster cushion........................ 39
Interior lighting......................................... 102
Interior rearview mirror............................... 76
automatic dimming............................... 76
Intermittent wiping..................................... 68
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats......... 40
J
Jack......................................................... 183
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 280
Key........................................................... 122
remote control key.............................. 122
Keypad in the steering wheel............ 70, 240
Kick-down
automatic gearbox.............................. 147
L
Lambda-sond.................................. 140, 290
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 218
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 196
Lighting.................................................... 218
Active Xenon headlamps................ 60, 63
automatic lighting, dipped beam.......... 62
automatic lighting, passenger compart-
ment.................................................... 103
bulbs, specifications........................... 291
cargo area........................................... 103
exterior.................................................. 62
headlamp levelling................................ 62
home safe lighting................................ 65
in passenger compartment................. 102
instrument lighting................................ 63
lighting panel, passenger compartment 62
main/dipped beam............................... 62
position/parking lamps......................... 62
reading lamps..................................... 102
rear fog lamp........................................ 63
switching headlamp pattern right/left-
hand traffic, ABL........................... 60, 171
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 218
bulb holder, rear................................. 221
bulb location front lamp...................... 219
cargo area........................................... 224
courtesy lighting................................. 223
dipped beam halogen......................... 219
direction indicators............................. 220
front.................................................... 218
main beam.......................................... 220
main beam halogen............................ 220
number plate lighting.......................... 223
parking lamps..................................... 220
position lamps.................................... 220
rear fog lamp...................................... 223
side marker lamps.............................. 220
vanity mirror........................................ 224
Loading
cargo area........................................... 114
general........................................ 112, 114
load capacity...................................... 112
12 Alphabetical Index
12
301
load carriers........................................ 112
roof load............................................. 112
Load on the roof...................................... 112
Locking/unlocking
glovebox............................................. 125
inside.................................................. 125
outside................................................ 124
tailgate................................................ 125
Lubricants................................................ 285
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 285
M
Main and dipped beam
switching............................................... 65
Main beam "flash"..................................... 65
Maintenance............................................ 205
rustproofing........................................ 200
self-maintenance................................ 205
Making calls............................................. 267
Massage
front seat............................................. 101
Master key............................................... 122
Menus
audio system...................................... 240
Menu structure
audio system...................................... 255
phone, menu options.......................... 264
phone, overview................................. 263
Messages in BLIS.................................... 157
Messages in the information display......... 58
Meters in the combined instrument panel
fuel gauge............................................. 53
outside temperature gauge.................. 53
speedometer......................................... 53
tachometer........................................... 53
trip meter.............................................. 53
Misting....................................................... 88
condensation in headlamps............... 194
rear window.......................................... 61
removing with defroster function.......... 93
Mobile phone
connect............................................... 269
handsfree............................................ 266
register phone..................................... 267
Mp3 functions.......................................... 253
Multi-filter........................................... 88, 141
MY KEY................................................... 240
N
News................................................ 248, 251
O
Oil, see also Engine oil....................... 56, 283
Oil level low.............................................. 209
One-key dial............................................. 259
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 13
Oxyhydrogen gas.................................... 161
P
PACOS....................................................... 22
PACOS, switch.......................................... 22
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 198
damage and touch-up........................ 198
Panel vents in the door pillar..................... 89
Parking assistance............................. 60, 153
parking assistance sensors................ 154
Parking brake....................................... 57, 72
12 Alphabetical Index
12
302
Parking heater
battery and fuel..................................... 95
general.................................................. 94
symbols and display messages............ 94
time setting........................................... 95
Parking lamps............................................ 62
Petrol grade............................................. 139
Phone
call volume.......................................... 260
connect............................................... 269
controls............................................... 257
ending a call....................................... 259
handsfree............................................ 266
incoming calls..................................... 267
last dialled numbers........................... 259
making calls................................ 259, 267
memory............................................... 261
messages........................................... 261
on/off.................................................. 258
one-key dial........................................ 259
phone book................................. 260, 269
phone book, shortcut......................... 269
receiving a call............................ 259, 268
register phone..................................... 267
shortcuts............................................. 258
SIM card............................................. 259
traffic safety........................................ 259
volume reduction during phone call... 258
Phone book............................................. 260
Phone system.......................................... 256
Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 82
Polishing.................................................. 195
Position lamps........................................... 62
Power seat................................................. 99
Power steering fluid, checking and topping
up............................................................. 212
Power sunroof........................................... 81
Power windows......................................... 74
blocking................................................ 75
passenger seat..................................... 75
rear seat................................................ 75
PTY – Programme type........................... 249
Puncture, see Tyres......................... 183, 185
R
Radio
alarm................................................... 249
AUTOSTORE...................................... 247
EON.................................................... 252
frequency update................................ 251
news........................................... 248, 251
PTY..................................................... 249
radio settings...................................... 247
radio stations...................................... 247
radio text............................................. 249
regional............................................... 251
storing stations................................... 247
traffic information................................ 249
tuning.................................................. 248
volume control, programme types..... 248
Radio functions........................................ 247
Radio text................................................ 249
Rain sensor................................................ 68
Random, CD and audio files.................... 254
RDS functions.......................................... 248
resetting.............................................. 252
Reading lamps......................................... 102
Rear centre console, removal.................. 110
Rear seat
boarding............................................. 110
Rear seat, lowering.................................. 110
Rearview and door mirrors
compass............................................... 76
door...................................................... 79
electrically retractable........................... 79
12 Alphabetical Index
12
303
heating.................................................. 61
interior................................................... 76
retractable............................................. 59
Rear window, defrosting............................ 61
Recirculation
ECC...................................................... 92
Refrigerant............................................... 208
Refuelling
fuel cap............................................... 139
refuelling............................................. 139
REG - Regional radio programmes......... 251
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 225
Remote control........................................ 122
replacing the battery........................... 123
Remote control, HomeLink
programmable ..................................... 83
Remote control key
functions............................................. 122
Remote control key system, type appro-
val............................................................ 293
Retractable power door mirrors (option). . . 59
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 194
RND – Random........................................ 254
Roll-over protection................................... 29
Roof load................................................. 112
ROPS (Roll Over Protection System)......... 29
ROPS (Roll Over Protection System) (Roll-
over protection).......................................... 29
Rustproofing............................................ 200
S
Safety grille.............................................. 116
Safety net................................................. 115
Scan
radio stations...................................... 248
Seatbelt
pregnancy............................................. 17
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17
Seatbelts.................................................... 16
seatbelt tensioner................................. 17
Seats
heating.................................................. 61
lowering the front backrest................... 98
lowering the rear backrest.................. 110
manual setting...................................... 98
power seat............................................ 99
Service programme................................. 204
Side airbag, SIPS....................................... 24
SIM card.................................................. 259
double................................................. 262
SIPS bag – decal....................................... 24
SIPS bags.................................................. 24
Sliding seat.............................................. 110
SMS......................................................... 261
write.................................................... 261
Soot filter........................................... 58, 141
Soot filter full............................................ 141
Sound
audio settings............................. 239, 245
audio source............................... 239, 242
Spare wheel............................................. 183
temporary spare................................. 182
Speed dial numbers................................. 259
Spin control............................................. 151
Spin Control............................................. 151
Spin control function............................... 151
SRS system
general.................................................. 20
Stability system....................................... 151
deactivation........................................ 151
12 Alphabetical Index
12
304
indicator................................................ 57
symbols.............................................. 151
Stains....................................................... 196
Standby mode, phone............................. 258
Start assistance....................................... 161
Starting the engine.................................. 143
Steering lock............................................ 143
Steering wheel
cruise control........................................ 70
keypad.......................................... 70, 240
steering wheel adjustment.................... 73
Stone chips and scratches...................... 198
Storage compartment...................... 107, 108
Storage spaces in the passenger compart-
ment......................................................... 104
Storing radio stations............................... 247
Streaming audio...................................... 244
Sunroof...................................................... 81
opening and closing............................. 81
pinch protection.................................... 82
sunscreen............................................. 82
ventilation position................................ 81
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 82
Surround.................................................. 245
Switching
main and dipped beam......................... 65
Symbols
indicator symbols................................. 56
stability system................................... 151
warning symbols................................... 55
T
Tailgate
driving with open tailgate................... 135
locking/unlocking................................ 122
open.................................................... 126
Technical data, engine............................. 282
Temperature
actual temperature............................... 88
Temperature control.................................. 93
Tools........................................................ 183
Towbar............................................. 163, 167
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 165
Towing..................................................... 159
towing eye.......................................... 159
Towing capacity............................... 163, 280
Towing equipment................................... 163
general........................................ 163, 165
installation........................................... 167
removing............................................. 169
specifications...................................... 166
Towing eye.............................................. 159
TP – Traffic information.................... 249, 251
Traction control system........................... 151
Traffic information............................ 249, 251
Trailer....................................................... 163
cable................................................... 165
driving with a trailer............................ 163
Trip computer............................................ 66
Type approval, remote control key sys-
tem........................................................... 293
Type designation..................................... 278
Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 180
driving characteristics......................... 178
general................................................ 178
maintenance....................................... 178
pressure...................................... 181, 289
puncture repair................................... 188
specifications...................................... 178
speed ratings...................................... 178
tread wear indicators.......................... 179
winter tyres......................................... 180
12 Alphabetical Index
12
305
U
USB, connection...................................... 243
V
Ventilation fan function.............................. 88
Vibration damper..................................... 165
Volume control......................................... 242
W
Warning lamp
stability and traction control system. . 151
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 19
Warning triangle....................................... 182
Washers
headlamps............................................ 69
rear window.......................................... 69
washer fluid, filling.............................. 210
windscreen........................................... 69
Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 80
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 195
Waxing..................................................... 195
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 280
trailer weight....................................... 163
Wheels
changing............................................. 185
installation........................................... 186
removal............................................... 185
snow chains........................................ 180
spare wheel........................................ 183
Whiplash injury.......................................... 27
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 27
whiplash injury...................................... 27
Windscreen washing.................................. 69
Windscreen wipers.................................... 68
rain sensor............................................ 68
Winter tyres.............................................. 180
Wiper
rear window.......................................... 69
Wiper blades............................................ 213
cleaning.............................................. 213
replacing, rear window....................... 213
replacing, windscreen......................... 213
12 Alphabetical Index
12
306
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc51&OHMJTI"51SJOUFEJO4XFEFO(zUFCPSH$PQZSJHIU©7PMWP$BS$PSQPSBUJPO
307

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Volvo XC90 - 2013 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Volvo XC90 - 2013 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 9,26 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Volvo XC90 - 2013

Volvo XC90 - 2013 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 328 pagina's

Volvo XC90 - 2013 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 332 pagina's

Volvo XC90 - 2013 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 328 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info